B ENGINE

EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C

E
CONTENTS
MODIFICATION NOTICE ............................................ 9 ... 70 F
Modification Notice ................................................... 9 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 70
How to Check Vehicle Type ..................................... 9 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 73
INDEX FOR DTC ...................................................... 10 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 78 G
Alphabetical Index .................................................. 10 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 78
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 15 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 82
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 20 Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 84
H
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Basic Inspection ..................................................... 85
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 90
SIONER” ................................................................ 20 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 94
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 102 I
A/T .......................................................................... 20 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 104
Precaution .............................................................. 20 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 104
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 23 CONSULT-II Function (ECM) ............................... 113 J
PREPARATION ......................................................... 24 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 126
Special Service Tools ............................................. 24 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 129
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 26 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
K
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 27 Mode ..................................................................... 133
System Diagram ..................................................... 27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 135
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 28 Description ............................................................ 135
System Chart ......................................................... 29 Testing Condition .................................................. 135 L
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 30 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 135
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 32 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 136
Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 33 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- M
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine DENT ....................................................................... 139
Speed) .................................................................... 33 Description ............................................................ 139
CAN communication .............................................. 34 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 35 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 140
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 35 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 140
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 143
Adjustment ............................................................. 37 Ground Inspection ................................................ 148
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 48 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 149
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 48 Description ............................................................ 149
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 49 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 149
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 51 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 149
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 53 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 150
Introduction ............................................................ 53 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 151
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 53 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................ 152
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 54 Description ............................................................ 152
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Revision: June 2004 EC-1 2004 Maxima

 . 152 Component Inspection .......................................... 194
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153 Removal and Installation ....................................... 194
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 153 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 195
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 154 Component Description ........................................ 195
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 155 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Description ............................................................ 155 .195
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 195
. 155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 196
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 155 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 197
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 156 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 198
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 157 Component Inspection .......................................... 200
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 161 Removal and Installation ....................................... 200
Component Inspection .......................................... 162 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 201
Removal and Installation ...................................... 163 Component Description ........................................ 201
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 164 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 201
Component Description ........................................ 164 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 202
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 202
. 164 Component Inspection .......................................... 203
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 164 Removal and Installation ....................................... 203
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 165 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 204
Overall Function Check ........................................ 166 Component Description ........................................ 204
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 167 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 204
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 204
Component Inspection .......................................... 171 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 205
Removal and Installation ...................................... 171 Component Inspection .......................................... 205
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 172 Removal and Installation ....................................... 206
Component Description ........................................ 172 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 207
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 207
. 172 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 207
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 207
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 173 Component Inspection .......................................... 208
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 174 Removal and Installation ....................................... 208
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 209
Component Inspection .......................................... 178 Component Description ........................................ 209
Removal and Installation ...................................... 178 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 179 .209
Component Description ........................................ 179 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 209
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 210
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 179 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 211
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 180 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 214
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 Component Inspection .......................................... 217
Component Inspection .......................................... 182 Removal and Installation ....................................... 218
Removal and Installation ...................................... 182 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 219
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 183 Component Description ........................................ 219
Component Description ........................................ 183 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 183 .219
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 219
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 185 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 220
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 186 Overall Function Check ......................................... 220
Component Inspection .......................................... 187 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 222
Removal and Installation ...................................... 187 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 225
DTC P0121 TP SENSOR ........................................ 188 Component Inspection .......................................... 228
Component Description ........................................ 188 Removal and Installation ....................................... 230
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
. 188 FUNCTION .............................................................. 231
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 231
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 190 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 233
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 191 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 235

Revision: June 2004 EC-2 2004 Maxima

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 282
FUNCTION .............................................................. 240 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 285 A
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 240 Component Inspection .......................................... 288
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 240 Removal and Installation ...................................... 288
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 242 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION ................................. 289 EC
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 244 Description ............................................................ 289
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 248 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 248 . 290
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 248 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 291 C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 248 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 291
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 250 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 293
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 251 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 294 D
Component Inspection ......................................... 252 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE ..... 297
Removal and Installation ...................................... 252 Description ............................................................ 297
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 253 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode E
Component Description ........................................ 253 . 298
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 253 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 298
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 253 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 298
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 254 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 299 F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 255 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 300
Component Inspection ......................................... 256 Component Inspection .......................................... 301
Removal and Installation ...................................... 256 Removal and Installation ...................................... 303 G
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 257 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR ...................... 304
Component Description ........................................ 257 Component Description ........................................ 304
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 304 H
. 257 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 305
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 257 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 307
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 258 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 308
I
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 259 Component Inspection .......................................... 309
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 260 Removal and Installation ...................................... 309
Component Inspection ......................................... 262 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
Removal and Installation ...................................... 262 TION ........................................................................ 310 J
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS- On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 310
FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 263 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 310
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 263 Overall Function Check ........................................ 311 K
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 263 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 312
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 314
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ........................................... 270 System Description ............................................... 314 L
Component Description ........................................ 270 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 314
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 270 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 314
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 270 Overall Function Check ........................................ 315
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 271 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 316 M
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 272 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 319
Component Inspection ......................................... 274 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 319
Removal and Installation ...................................... 274 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 320
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 275 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 322
Component Description ........................................ 275 Component Inspection .......................................... 328
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
. 275 UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 329
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 275 Description ............................................................ 329
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 275 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 276 . 329
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 277 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 330
Component Inspection ......................................... 280 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 330
Removal and Installation ...................................... 280 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 331
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ........ 281 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 333
Component Description ........................................ 281 Component Inspection .......................................... 334
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 281 Removal and Installation ...................................... 335
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 281 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL

Revision: June 2004 EC-3 2004 Maxima

VALVE ..................................................................... 336 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 381
Component Description ........................................ 336 Removal and Installation ....................................... 381
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ........... 382
. 336 Component Description ........................................ 382
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 336 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 337 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 338 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 383
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 339 Removal and Installation ....................................... 383
Component Inspection .......................................... 341 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 384
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE Description ............................................................ 384
SENSOR .................................................................. 343 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 384
Component Description ........................................ 343 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 384
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Overall Function Check ......................................... 384
. 343 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 385
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 343 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 386
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 344 Description ............................................................ 386
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 344 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 386
Component Inspection .......................................... 345 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 386
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 387
SENSOR .................................................................. 346 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 388
Component Description ........................................ 346 Description ............................................................ 388
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 388
. 346 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 388
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 346 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 389
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 347 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 390
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 348 Component Description ........................................ 390
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 349 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Inspection .......................................... 351 .390
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 390
SENSOR .................................................................. 352 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 390
Component Description ........................................ 352 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 391
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 392
. 352 Component Inspection .......................................... 394
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 352 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 395
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 353 Component Description ........................................ 395
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 354 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 395
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 355 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 395
Component Inspection .......................................... 359 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 396
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 360 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 360 HEATER ................................................................... 398
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 361 Description ............................................................ 398
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 362 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 368 .398
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 368 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 398
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 369 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 398
Overall Function Check ........................................ 370 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 400
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 371 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 403
Component Inspection .......................................... 377 Component Inspection .......................................... 405
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 378 Removal and Installation ....................................... 405
Component Description ........................................ 378 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 406
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 378 Component Description ........................................ 406
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 378 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 406
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 379 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 406
Removal and Installation ...................................... 379 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 407
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 380 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 408
Component Description ........................................ 380 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 380 VALVE ...................................................................... 410
Overall Function Check ........................................ 380 Component Description ........................................ 410
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Revision: June 2004 EC-4 2004 Maxima

 . 410 Component Inspection .......................................... 456
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 410 Removal and Installation ...................................... 458 A
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 410 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 459
Wiring Diagram .....................................................411 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 459
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 414 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT .......................... 460 EC
Component Inspection ......................................... 416 Description ............................................................ 460
Removal and Installation ...................................... 416 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 460
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 460
ACTUATOR ............................................................ 417 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 460 C
Component Description ........................................ 417 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 461
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 417 Description ............................................................ 461
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 417 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 461 D
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 418 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 461
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 461
FUNCTION .............................................................. 419 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 462 E
Description ........................................................... 419 System Description ............................................... 462
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 419 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 419 . 463
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 420 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 463 F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 421 Overall Function Check ........................................ 464
Component Inspection ......................................... 424 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 465
Remove and Installation ....................................... 424 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 467 G
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 472
RELAY .................................................................... 425 Component Inspection .......................................... 472
Component Description ........................................ 425 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 473 H
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description ........................................ 473
. 425 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 425 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 473
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 425 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 474
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 427 Removal and Installation ...................................... 474
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 428 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 475
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 430 Component Description ........................................ 475 J
Component Description ........................................ 430 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 475
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 430 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 475
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 430 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 476 K
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 431 Removal and Installation ...................................... 476
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 432 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 477
Component Inspection ......................................... 433 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 477 L
Removal and Installation ...................................... 434 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 477
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ..................................... 435 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 478
Component Description ........................................ 435 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 479
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR .......................... 481 M
. 435 Component Description ........................................ 481
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 435 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 436 . 481
Overall Function Check ........................................ 436 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 481
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 438 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 481
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 441 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 483
Component Inspection ......................................... 444 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 486
Removal and Installation ...................................... 446 Removal and Installation ...................................... 487
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ..................................... 447 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR .......................... 488
Component Description ........................................ 447 Component Description ........................................ 488
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 447 . 488
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 447 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 488
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 448 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 488
Overall Function Check ........................................ 448 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 490
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 450 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 493
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 453 Removal and Installation ...................................... 494

Revision: June 2004 EC-5 2004 Maxima

DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR ........................... 495 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 553
Component Description ........................................ 495 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 553
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 554
. 495 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 556
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 495 Component Inspection .......................................... 559
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 495 Removal and Installation ....................................... 559
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 497 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 500 VALVE ...................................................................... 560
Removal and Installation ...................................... 503 Component Description ........................................ 560
DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR ........................... 504 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 504 .560
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 560
. 504 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 561
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 504 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 562
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 563
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506 Component Inspection .......................................... 565
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 509 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 567
Removal and Installation ...................................... 512 Component Description ........................................ 567
DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR ........................... 513 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 513 .567
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 567
. 513 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 568
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 513 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 569
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 513 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 571
Overall Function Check ........................................ 514 Component Inspection .......................................... 573
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 516 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 574
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 519 Component Description ........................................ 574
Removal and Installation ...................................... 520 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR ........................... 521 .574
Component Description ........................................ 521 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 574
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC confirmation Procedure ................................ 575
. 521 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 576
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 521 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 578
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 522 Component Inspection .......................................... 583
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 524 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 585
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 527 Component Description ........................................ 585
Removal and Installation ...................................... 532 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 585
DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR ........................... 533 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 585
Component Description ........................................ 533 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 586
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 587
. 533 Component Description ........................................ 587
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 533 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 534 .587
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 536 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 587
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 539 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 587
Removal and Installation ...................................... 544 Overall Function Check ......................................... 588
DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION .................................. 545 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 589
Description ............................................................ 545 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 590
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE . 595
. 546 Component Description ........................................ 595
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 547 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 547 .595
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 549 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 595
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 550 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 595
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 596
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 552 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 597
Description ............................................................ 552 Component Inspection .......................................... 598
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 599
. 552 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 600

Revision: June 2004 EC-6 2004 Maxima

 Description ........................................................... 600 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 644
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 647 A
. 600 Removal and Installation ...................................... 648
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 600 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 649
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 600 Component Description ........................................ 649 EC
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 601 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 602 . 649
Component Inspection ......................................... 604 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 650
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................ 605 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 651 C
Component Description ........................................ 605 Component Inspection .......................................... 654
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ...................................... 654
. 605 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 655 D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 605 Description ............................................................ 655
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 606 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 607 . 655 E
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 608 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 656
Component Inspection ......................................... 610 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 657
Removal and Installation ...................................... 610 Component Inspection .......................................... 660
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .........................611 Removal and Installation ...................................... 660 F
Component Description .........................................611 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT . 661
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode System Description ............................................... 661
..611 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode G
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................611 . 661
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 612 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 662
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 613 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 663 H
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 614 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 666
Component Inspection ......................................... 616 Component Description ........................................ 666
Removal and Installation ...................................... 616 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 667
I
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 617 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 668
Component Description ........................................ 617 Removal and Installation ...................................... 670
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 671
. 617 Description ............................................................ 671 J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 617 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 618 . 671
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 619 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 671 K
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 620 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 672
Component Inspection ......................................... 622 Component Description ........................................ 672
Removal and Installation ...................................... 622 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode L
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 623 . 672
Component Description ........................................ 623 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 673
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 675
. 623 Component Inspection .......................................... 681 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 623 ASCD INDICATOR .................................................. 682
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 624 Component Description ........................................ 682
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 625 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 626 . 682
Component Inspection ......................................... 628 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 683
Removal and Installation ...................................... 628 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 684
IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 629 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 685
Component Description ........................................ 629 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 685
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 630 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 687
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 635 Description ............................................................ 687
Component Inspection ......................................... 639 Component Inspection .......................................... 690
Removal and Installation ...................................... 640 Removal and Installation ...................................... 691
VIAS ........................................................................ 641 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ...................... 691
Description ........................................................... 641 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode (ORVR) .................................................................... 694
. 642 System Description ............................................... 694
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 643

Revision: June 2004 EC-7 2004 Maxima

 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 695 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 705
Component Inspection .......................................... 698 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 705
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 700 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................... 705
Description ............................................................ 700 EGR Temperature Sensor ..................................... 705
Component Inspection .......................................... 700 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 705
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 702 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 705
System Description ............................................... 702 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 706
Component Description ........................................ 704 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 706
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 705 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 706
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 705 Injector .................................................................. 706
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 705 Fuel Pump ............................................................. 706
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 705

Revision: June 2004 EC-8 2004 Maxima

 MODIFICATION NOTICE

MODIFICATION NOTICE PFP:00000

A
Modification Notice EBS00KIZ

2-step modifications have been adopted.

FIRST STEP EC
● DTC P0451 has been added.
SECOND STEP C
● On Board Diagnosis Logic for some DTCs has been changed.
How to Check Vehicle Type EBS00KJ0
D
Check the vehicle serial number to confirm the type of vehicles.
Vehicle Type Vehicle Serial Number
E
Type I (Initial products) Up to serial 858454
Type II (First step) From serial 858455
Type II (Second step) From serial 868337 F

Revision: June 2004 EC-9 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

Alphabetical Index UBS0090M

NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
×:Applicable —: Not applicable

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1271 1271 2 × EC-481
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1272 1272 2 × EC-488
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1273 1273 2 × EC-495
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1274 1274 2 × EC-504
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 1276 2 × EC-513
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278 1278 2 × EC-521
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1279 1279 2 × EC-533
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1281 1281 2 × EC-481
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1282 1282 2 × EC-488
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1283 1283 2 × EC-495
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1284 1284 2 × EC-504
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 1286 2 × EC-513
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288 1288 2 × EC-521
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1289 1289 2 × EC-533
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 2 × EC-398
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 2 × EC-398
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 2 × EC-398
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 2 × EC-398

2*6 × AT-127
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731
1*7 × AT-499

2*6 × AT-132
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732
1* 7 × AT-502

2*6 × AT-137
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733
1* 7 × AT-508

2*6 × AT-142
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734
1*7 × AT-514

A/T 5HT GR FNCTN*7 P0735 0735 1 × AT-519

2*6 × AT-154
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744
1*7 × AT-525
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-605
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-605
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-611
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-611
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-623
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-574

Revision: June 2004 EC-10 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-567 EC
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-585

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*6 P0710 0710 2 × AT-112

C
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC* 7 P0710 0710 2 × AT-479
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-600
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 1 × EC-149 D
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 2 — EC-149
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-275
E
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 × EC-459
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 1 × EC-459
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-281 F
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 2 × EC-281
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-473
G
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-475
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 × EC-263
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 × EC-263 H
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 × EC-263
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 × EC-263
I
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 2 × EC-263
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 2 × EC-263
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-395 J
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 2 × EC-406
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 × EC-183
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 × EC-183 K
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 × EC-201
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 2 × EC-289 L
EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 2 × EC-545
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0405 0405 2 × EC-304
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0406 0406 2 × EC-304 M
EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 1 × EC-297
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-462

ENGINE SPEED SIG*7 P0725 0725 2 × AT-123

ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 × EC-417
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-419
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-430
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-425
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-425
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 × EC-360
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 × EC-314
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 × EC-319

EVAP SYS PRES SEN*8 P0451 0451 2 × EC-343

Revision: June 2004 EC-11 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*3
GST*
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 × EC-346
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 × EC-352
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 × EC-368

FLUID TEMP SEN*7 P0711 0711 2 × AT-484

FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 × EC-253
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 × EC-253
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 × EC-248
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 × EC-378
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 × EC-380
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 × EC-382
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 2 × EC-382
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 × EC-231
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 2 × EC-231
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 × EC-240
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 2 × EC-240
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 × EC-209
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 × EC-219
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 × EC-435
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 × EC-447
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 2 × EC-209
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 2 × EC-219
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 2 × EC-435
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 2 × EC-447
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 × EC-155
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 × EC-155
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 2 × EC-155
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 2 × EC-155
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 × EC-179
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 × EC-179
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 2 × EC-204
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 × EC-152
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 2 × EC-152
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-410
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 2 × EC-410
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 × EC-386
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 × EC-388
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-270
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-270

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC*6 P0745 0745 2 × AT-162

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 × EC-164
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 × EC-172
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 × EC-172

Revision: June 2004 EC-12 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 × EC-263 EC
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — BL-98
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — C
MAY BE REQUIRED.

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC*6 P1760 1760 2 × AT-184

PC SOL A(L/PRESS)*7 P0745 0745 1 × AT-528 D

PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)*7 P0775 0775 1 × AT-563

PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)*7 P0795 0795 1 × AT-572 E

PC SOL C STC ON*7 P0797 0797 1 × AT-577
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 × EC-587
F
2*6 × AT-106
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705
1*7 × AT-474
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 × EC-329
G

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 × EC-329

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 2 × EC-552 H
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-390
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-477
× I
SFT SOL A/CIRC*6 P0750 0750 1 AT-168

SFT SOL B/CIRC*6 P0755 0755 1 × AT-173

SFT SOL C STUCK ON*7 P0762 0762 1 × AT-548 J

SHIFT*7 P0780 0780 1 × AT-568

SHIFT SOL A*7 P0750 0750 1 × AT-533

K
SHIFT SOL B*7 P0755 0755 1 × AT-538

SHIFT SOL C*7 P0760 0760 1 × AT-543

L
SHIFT SOL D* 7 P0765 0765 1 × AT-553

SHIFT SOL E*7 P0770 0770 1 × AT-558

M
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC*6 P0740 0740 2 × AT-149

TCM POWER INPT SIG*7 P0882 0882 1 — AT-588

TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 2 — EC-460
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-461
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 × EC-207

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*6 P1705 1705 1 × AT-178

TP SEN/CIRCUIT P0121 0121 1 × EC-188
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-257
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-257
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-195
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-195
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-617

TURBINE SENSOR* 7 P0717 0717 1 × AT-489

Revision: June 2004 EC-13 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*3
GST*
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 × EC-310
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 2 × EC-310

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 *6 P0720 0720 2 × AT-118

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 P0500 0500 2 × EC-384

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 × EC-336
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 × EC-560

VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*7 P0722 0722 1 × AT-493

VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 2 — EC-595
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*6: 4-speed A/T models
*7: 5-speed A/T models
*8: Type II and type III vehicles

Revision: June 2004 EC-14 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index UBS0090N

A
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
×:Applicable —: Not applicable EC
DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up C
ECM*3
GST*2
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 × EC-149

U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-149 D

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED. E
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 × EC-152
P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 2 × EC-152
F
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-155
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-155
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-155 G
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-155
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-164
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-172
H

P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-172

P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-179
I
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-179
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-183
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-183 J
P0121 0121 TP SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-188
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-195
K
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-195
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 × EC-201
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR 2 × EC-204 L
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 × EC-207
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-209
M
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-219
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-209
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-219
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 × EC-231
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 × EC-240
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 2 × EC-231
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 2 × EC-240
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 × EC-248
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-253
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-253
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-257
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-257
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 × EC-263

Revision: June 2004 EC-15 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*3
GST*
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE 2 × EC-263
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-270
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-270
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-275
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-281
P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 2 × EC-281
P0400 0400 EGR SYSTEM 2 × EC-289
P0403 0403 EGR VOL CON/V CIR 1 × EC-297
P0405 0405 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-304
P0406 0406 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-304
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 × EC-310
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 2 × EC-310
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 × EC-314
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 × EC-319
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-329
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-329
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-336
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN* 8 2 × EC-343
P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-346
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 × EC-352
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 × EC-360
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 × EC-368
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH 2 × EC-378
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 × EC-380
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-382
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-382
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 2 × EC-384
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-386
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM 2 × EC-388
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-390
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-395

2*6 × AT-106
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC
1*7 × AT-474

P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*6 2 × AT-112

P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*7 2 × AT-479

P0711 0711 FLUID TEMP SEN*7 2 × AT-484

Revision: June 2004 EC-16 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
P0717 0717 TURBINE SENSOR*7 1 × AT-489 EC
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 *6 2 × AT-118

P0722 0722 VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*7 1 × AT-493

C
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG*6 2 × AT-123

2*6 × AT-127
P0731 0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN D
1*7 × AT-499

2*6 × AT-132
P0732 0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
1*7 × AT-502 E

2*6 × AT-137
P0733 0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
1*7 × AT-508 F
2*6 × AT-142
P0734 0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
1*7 × AT-514
G
P0735 0735 A/T 5TH GR FNCTN*7 1 × AT-519

P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC*6 2 × AT-149

H
2*6 × AT-154
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
1*7 × AT-525

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC*6 2 × AT-162 I

P0745 0745
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)*7 1 × AT-528

SFT SOL A/CIRC*6 1 × AT-168 J

P0750 0750
SHIFT SOL A*7 1 × AT-533

SFT SOL B/CIRC*6 1 × AT-173

P0755 0755 K
SHIFT SOL B*7 1 × AT-538

P0760 0760 SHIFT SOL C*7 1 × AT-543

L
P0762 0762 SFT SOL C STUCK ON*7 1 × AT-548

P0765 0765 SHIFT SOL D*7 1 × AT-553

×
M
P0770 0770 SHIFT SOL E*7 1 AT-558

P0775 0775 PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)*7 1 × AT-563

P0780 0780 SFIFT*7 1 × AT-568

P0795 0795 PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)* 7 1 × AT-572

P0797 0797 PC SOL C STC ON*7 1 × AT-577

P0882 0882 TCM POWER INPT SIG*7 1 × AT-588

P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-398
P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) 2 × EC-398
P1051 1051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-398
P1052 1052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) 2 × EC-398
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-406
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-410
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 or 2 × EC-417

Revision: June 2004 EC-17 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
2 ECM*3
GST*
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-419
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-425
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-425
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-430
P1136 1136 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 2 × EC-410
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-435
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-447
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 × EC-459
P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-435
P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-447
P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 1 × EC-459
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN 2 — EC-460
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC 2 — EC-461
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-462
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-473
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-475
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-477
P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-481
P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-488
P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-495
P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-504
P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-513
P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-521
P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR (B1) 2 × EC-533
P1281 1281 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-481
P1282 1282 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-488
P1283 1283 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-495
P1284 1284 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-504
P1286 1286 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-513
P1288 1288 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-521
P1289 1289 A/F SENSOR (B2) 2 × EC-533
P1402 1402 EGR SYSTEM 2 × EC-545
P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 × EC-552
P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 × EC-560
P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-567
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-574
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-585
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — BL-98
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T* 6 1 × AT-178
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-587
P1760 1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC*6 2 × AT-184
P1800 1800 VIAS S/V CIRC 2 — EC-595

Revision: June 2004 EC-18 2004 Maxima

 INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting A
CONSULT-II Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM*3
GST*2
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-600 EC
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-605
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-605
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-611 C
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-611
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-617
D
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-623
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. E
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*6: 4-speed A/T models F
*7: 5-speed A/T models
*8: Type II and type III vehicles

Revision: June 2004 EC-19 2004 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00ALD

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS0090P

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-61, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution UBS0090Q

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H

Revision: June 2004 EC-20 2004 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

● Do not disassemble ECM.

● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to A
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis- EC
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
C

PBIB1164E

D
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with levers as far as they will go as shown in the
figure. E

G
BBIA0282E

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or H

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM I
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) J
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) K
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E

tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. L
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-104, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" M
.
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri- MEF040D
ous incidents.
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).

Revision: June 2004 EC-21 2004 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.

SEF217U

● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.

SEF348N

● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown

in the figure.

SEC893C

Revision: June 2004 EC-22 2004 Maxima

 PRECAUTIONS

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. A

EC

BBIA0081E

D
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily. E
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.

G
SEF709Y

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure H

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic I
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls. J
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller. K
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis UBS0090R
L
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
● GI-12, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit M
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
● GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

Revision: June 2004 EC-23 2004 Maxima

 PREPARATION

PREPARATION PFP:00002

Special Service Tools UBS0090S

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
(J-36471-A) with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench

S-NT379

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

(J-38365) a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench

S-NT636

(J-44626) Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sen-
sor wrench

LEM054

(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure

Fuel pressure gauge
kit

LEC642

(J-44321-6) Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector

Fuel pressure adapter type fuel lines.

LBIA0376E

(J-45488) Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room

Quick connector re-
lease

PBIC0198E

Revision: June 2004 EC-24 2004 Maxima

 PREPARATION

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description A
Tool name
KV109E0010 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
(J-46209) EC
Break-out box

S-NT825

KV109E0080 Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester D

(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter

S-NT826

Revision: June 2004 EC-25 2004 Maxima

 PREPARATION

Commercial Service Tools UBS0090T

Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)

S-NT703

EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)

S-NT704

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure

S-NT815

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor

S-NT705

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

i.e.: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907)

S-NT779

Revision: June 2004 EC-26 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710

A
System Diagram UBS0090U

EC

PBIB1581E

Revision: June 2004 EC-27 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS0090V

BBIA0313E

Refer to EC-27, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.

Revision: June 2004 EC-28 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

System Chart UBS0090W

A
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor EC
● Mass air flow sensor
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay*4
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 C
● Throttle position sensor On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)*4
● Accelerator pedal position sensor EGR control EGR volume control valve
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve D
● Intake air temperature sensor
Intake valve timing control solenoid
● Power steering pressure sensor Intake valve timing control
valve
● Ignition switch Engine mount control Electronic controlled engine mount
E
● Battery voltage
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● Knock sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● Refrigerant pressure sensor F
● Stop lamp switch EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge flow control
solenoid valve
● ASCD steering switch
● ASCD brake switch Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay*4 G
● Fuel level sensor*1 *3 Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays*4
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
H
● Fuel tank temperature sensor*1
● EGR temperature sensor*1
● Heated oxygen sensor 2 *2 I
3
● TCM (Transmission control module) * ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve
● Air conditioner switch*3
J
● Wheel sensor*3
● Electrical load signal*3
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) *3 K
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: These input signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. L
*4: These output signals are sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.

Revision: June 2004 EC-29 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS0090X

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injectors
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation

Heated oxygen sensor 2 *1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation

Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed

*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*2: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation

Revision: June 2004 EC-30 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)

A

EC

SEF503YB D
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (Manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM E
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-481, "DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR" . This maintains the mixture ratio
within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (Manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal
from heated oxygen sensor 2. G
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. H
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit I
● Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
J
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
● When starting the engine K
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret- L
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. M
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

Revision: June 2004 EC-31 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

FUEL INJECTION TIMING

SEF179U

Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS0090Y

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Ignition timing
Power transistor
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage*2

Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M

● During warm-up

Revision: June 2004 EC-32 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

● At idle
● At low battery voltage A
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not EC
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
C
Air Conditioning Cut Control UBS0090Z

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
D
1 Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner switch*
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Air conditioner
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner relay F
cut control
Battery Battery voltage*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure G
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
1 Vehicle speed
Wheel sensor*
H
*1: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. J
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. K
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
L
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00910

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART M

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel cut con-
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel injectors
trol
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed

*1: Signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.

Revision: June 2004 EC-33 2004 Maxima

 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-30 .
CAN communication UBS00911

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-8, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.

Revision: June 2004 EC-34 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018

A
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00912

IGNITION TIMING
Method A EC
1. Slide the harness protector off ignition coil No.1 to clear the
wires.
2. Attach timing light to the ignition coil No.1 wires. C

E
BBIA0196E

3. Check ignition timing.

F

BBIA0032E
I
Method B
1. Remove No.1 ignition coil.
J

BBIA0196E

M
2. Connect No.1 ignition coil and spark plug with suitable high-ten-
sion wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.

BBIA0082E

Revision: June 2004 EC-35 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

SEF166Y

3. Check ignition timing.

BBIA0032E

IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEF058Y

With GST
Check idle speed with GST.

Revision: June 2004 EC-36 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS00913

PREPARATION A
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
● Battery

● Ignition system
EC
● Engine oil and coolant levels

● Fuses
C
● ECM harness connector

● Vacuum hoses

● Air intake system D

(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
● Fuel pressure

● Engine compression E
● EGR volume control valve operation

● Throttle valve

● Evaporative emission system F

2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position. G
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
5. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.
H
6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
7. Make the check after the cooling fans have stopped.
I

Revision: June 2004 EC-37 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE

PBIB1206E

Revision: June 2004 EC-38 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
A
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance. EC
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
D
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
– Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U

– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge. G
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U
J
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. L

M
SEF977U

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-39 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

SEF978U

3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 5.

5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-40 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A

Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4. C

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
F
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm H
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
J
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. K
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-281 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-275 .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4. M

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-100, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .

>> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-41 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 12.

12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 13.

13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.

14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

Revision: June 2004 EC-42 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
EC
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG C
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 16. D

16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. F
2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G

Check the following.

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-281 . H
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-275 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. I
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
J
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
K
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-100, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
L

>> GO TO 4.
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-43 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T mod-
els) or 5th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 21.

20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T mod-
els) or 5th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 21.

Revision: June 2004 EC-44 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-483, "Wiring Diagram" .
Bank 1 Bank 2 C
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
24 4 2 4
D
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6 E
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist. F

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22. G
NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.
2. GO TO 4. H

22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
J
>> GO TO 23.

23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING K

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 24. L

24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

M
Refer to EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-45 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

25. CHECK CO%

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
3. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN”
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG >> GO TO 27.
SEF172Y

26. CHECK CO%

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature SEF982UA

sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG >> GO TO 27.

27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

>> GO TO 31.

28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

1. Stop engine.
2. Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29.

Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 30.

Revision: June 2004 EC-46 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
EC
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T mod-
els) or 5th position (M/T models).
C
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH). D
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times. E
6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 31.
G
30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
With GST H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position with “OD” OFF (A/T mod- I
els) or 5th position (M/T models).
NOTE:
Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. J
4. Set “OD” ON, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30
MPH).
NOTE: K
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. L
7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed.
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 31.

Revision: June 2004 EC-47 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE
CHECK" .
● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-164 and EC-
172 .
● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-649 .
● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-
183 and EC-201 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 33.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 32.

32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC

After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-68, "How to Erase DTC" and AT-40, "OBD-II Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)" or AT-425, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .

>> GO TO 4.

33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-100, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .

>> GO TO 4.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00914

DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00915

DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.

Revision: June 2004 EC-48 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00916

DESCRIPTION A
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. EC
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION C
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) D
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF E
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started the headlamp will not be illuminated.
F
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up G
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “AT” (4-
speed A/T) or “TRANSMISSION” (5-speed A/T) system indicates less than 0.9V.
For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
H
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . I
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. J
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.

M
SEF217Z

6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

SEF454Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-49 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 625±50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700±50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675±50 rpm (in P or N position) MBIB0238E

Ignition timing M/T: 15±5° BTDC

A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.

SEC897C

12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 625±50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700±50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675±50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing M/T: 15±5° BTDC
A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)

Revision: June 2004 EC-50 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- A
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: EC
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
C
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
D
It is useful to perform EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again:
E
● Engine stalls.

● Erroneous idle.

Fuel Pressure Check UBS00917 F

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: G
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because A34 models do not have fuel return system.
With CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II. I
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. J
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

SEF214Y
L
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. M
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.

BBIA0229E

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector o-ring maintains sealability.
● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure.

Revision: June 2004 EC-51 2004 Maxima

 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-24, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.

● Keep fuel hose connections clean.

3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure

Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure.
● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge adapter.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.

LBIA0377E

4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
8. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging

● Fuel filter for clogging

● Fuel pump

● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging

If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

If NG, repair or replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure
to zero. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-52 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

A
Introduction UBS00918

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979
C
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979 D
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979 E

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
F
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II × × × × × —
G
GST × ×*1 × — × ×
ECM × ×*2 — — — —

*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. H
*2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-84, I
"Fail-safe Chart" .)
Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00919
J
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in K
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. L
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip
M
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Lighting Lighting displaying displaying displaying displaying
Blinking Blinking
up up
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
— × — — × — — —
(Refer to EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
Except above — — — × — × × —

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is
malfunction on engine control system.

Revision: June 2004 EC-53 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Emission-related Diagnostic Information UBS0091A

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1 Test value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) 3 page
ECM* (GST only)
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 — — — EC-149

CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 — — × EC-149

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — × EC-152
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — × EC-152
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × ×* 8 EC-155

HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × ×*8 EC-155

HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 × × ×*8 EC-155

HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 × × ×* 8 EC-155

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — — EC-164
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-172
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-172
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — × EC-179
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — × EC-179
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-183
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-183
TP SEN/CIRCUIT P0121 0121 — — — EC-188
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-195
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-195
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — — EC-201
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — × EC-204
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — × EC-207
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — — × EC-209
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × ×* 8 EC-219
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 — — × EC-209
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × ×* 8 EC-219
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — × EC-231
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — × EC-240
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — × EC-231
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — × EC-240
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — × EC-248
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — × EC-253
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — × EC-253

Revision: June 2004 EC-54 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference A
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-257 EC
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-257
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — × EC-263
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — × EC-263 C
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — × EC-263
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — × EC-263
D
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — × EC-263
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — × EC-263
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — × EC-263 E
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — × EC-270
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — × EC-270
F
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — × EC-275
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — × EC-281
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — × EC-281 G
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0400 × × ×*8 EC-289
EGR VOL CON/V CIR P0403 0403 — — — EC-297
H
EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC P0405 0405 — — × EC-304
EGR TEMP SEN/ CIRC P0406 0406 — — × EC-304
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × ×*8 EC-310 I
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × × ×*8 EC-310

EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × ×*8 EC-314 J

EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × ×*8 EC-319
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — × EC-329
K
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — × EC-329
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — × EC-336

EVAP SYS PRES SEN*10 P0451 0451 — — × EC-343 L

EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — × EC-346
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — × EC-352
M
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 × × ×*8 EC-360

EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*9 × ×*8 EC-368

FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — × EC-378
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — × EC-380
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — × EC-382
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — × EC-382

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 P0500 0500 — — × EC-384

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — × EC-386
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — × EC-388
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — × EC-390
ECM P0605 0605 — — × or — EC-395

×*6 AT-106
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — —
—*7 AT-474

Revision: June 2004 EC-55 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*6 P0710 0710 — — × AT-112

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC*7 P0710 0710 — — × AT-479

FLUID TEMP SEN*7 P0711 0711 — — × AT-484

TURBINE SENSOR*7 P0717 0717 — — — AT-489

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 *6 P0720 0720 — — × AT-118

VHCL SPEED SEN·AT*7 P0722 0722 — — — AT-493

ENGINE SPEED SIG*6 P0725 0725 — — × AT-123

×*6 AT-127
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 0731 — —
—*7 AT-499

×*6 AT-132
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 0732 — —
—*7 AT-502

×*6 AT-137
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 0733 — —
—*7 AT-508

×*6 AT-142
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 0734 — —
7 AT-514
—*

A/T 5TH GR FNCTN*7 P0735 0735 — — — AT-519

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC*6 P0740 0740 — — × AT-149

×*6 AT-154
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — —
—*7 AT-525

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC*6 × AT-162

P0745 0745 — —
PC SOL A(L/PRESS)*7 — AT-528

SFT SOL A/CIRC*6 AT-168

P0750 0750 — — —
SHIFT SOL A*7 AT-533

SFT SOL B/CIRC*6 AT-173

P0755 0755 — — —
SHIFT SOL B*7 AT-538

SHIFT SOL C*7 P0760 0760 — — — AT-543

SFT SOL C STUCK ON*7 P0762 0762 — — — AT-548

SHIFT SOL D*7 P0765 0765 — — — AT-553

SHIFT SOL E*7 P0770 0770 — — — AT-558

PC SOL B(SFT/PRS)*7 P0775 0775 — — — AT-563

SHIFT*7 P0780 0780 — — — AT-568

PC SOL C(TCC&SFT)*7 P0795 0795 — — — AT-572

PC SOL C STC ON*7 P0797 0797 — — — AT-577

TCM POWER INPT SIG*7 P0882 0882 — — — AT-588

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × ×*8 EC-398

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × ×*8 EC-398

A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 × × ×*8 EC-398

Revision: June 2004 EC-56 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference A
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 × × ×*8 EC-398 EC
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — × EC-406
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — × EC-410
C
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — × or — EC-417
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-419
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-425 D
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-425
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-430
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 — — × EC-410 E

HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × ×*8 EC-435

HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × ×*8 EC-447 F

CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-459
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 × × ×*8 EC-435
G
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 × × ×*8 EC-447
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — — EC-459
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — × EC-460 H
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — × EC-461
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-462
I
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — × EC-473
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — × EC-475
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-477 J
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 — — × EC-481
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 — — × EC-488
K
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 — — × EC-495
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 — — × EC-504
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 — — × EC-513 L
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × ×*8 EC-521

A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × ×*8 EC-533

M
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 — — × EC-481
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 — — × EC-488
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 — — × EC-495
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 — — × EC-504
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 — — × EC-513
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 × × ×*8 EC-521

A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 × × ×*8 EC-533

EGR SYSTEM P1402 1402 × × ×*8 EC-545

PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — × EC-552
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — × EC-560
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-567
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-574
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — — EC-585

Revision: June 2004 EC-57 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

DTC*1 Test value/

Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) page
ECM*3 (GST only)
GST*2
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — × BL-98
P1615

TP SEN CIRC A/T*6 P1705 1705 — — — AT-178

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — × EC-587

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC*6 P1760 1760 — — × AT-184

VIAS S/V CIRC P1800 1800 — — × EC-595
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — × EC-600
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-605
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-605
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-611
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-611
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-617
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-623
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
*6: 4-speed models
*7: 5-speed models
*8: These are not displayed with GST.
*9: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*10: Type II and type III vehicles

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-68, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-54, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and
therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehi-
cle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-79, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir-
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST

Revision: June 2004 EC-58 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. A
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. EC
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
C
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended. D
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. E
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
F

PBIB0911E I
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake J
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or K
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-117, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority L
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- M
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.

Revision: June 2004 EC-59 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.

Revision: June 2004 EC-60 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. A
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-II indication) Priority*1 DTC No.
EC
CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
3 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system P0442 C
3 EVAP control system P0456
HO2S 3 A/F sensor 1 P1278, P1288
A/F sensor 1 P1279, P1289 D
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146, P1166
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147, P1167
HO2S HTR 3 A/F sensor 1 heater P1031, P1032,
P1051, P1052
F
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038,
P0057, P0058
EGR SYSTEM 3 EGR function P0400 G
1 EGR function P1402
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II. H
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
I
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
J
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
K
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” L
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
M
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above

Revision: June 2004 EC-61 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.

Revision: June 2004 EC-62 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

EC

SEF573XA

*1 EC-58, "How to Read DTC and 1st *2 EC-63, "How to Display SRT Code" *3 EC-64, "How to Set SRT Code"
Trip DTC"

How to Display SRT Code

WITH CONSULT-II

Revision: June 2004 EC-63 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with

CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown in the fig-
ure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) SEF713Y

How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-61, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Revision: June 2004 EC-64 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Driving Pattern
A

EC

PBIB1680E

Revision: June 2004 EC-65 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

● The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
● Sea level
● Flat road
● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
● The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
● Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times.
– During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as
possible.
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.

SEF414S

Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models

Set the selector lever in the D position.
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.

Revision: June 2004 EC-66 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

For quick acceleration in low altitude A

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
areas and high altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change [over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
ACCEL shift point CRUISE shift point
km/h EC
km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 21 (13) 14 (15)
2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25)
C
3rd to 4th 53 (33) 44 (27) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 63 (39) 58 (36) 72 (45)
6th 80 (50) 80 (50) 80 (50) D

Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
E
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine
damage or loss of vehicle control. F

Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 55 (35) G
2nd 95 (60)
3rd —
4th — H
5th —
6th —
I
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while J
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (26 test K
items).
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable L
Test value (GST display) Applica-
SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Unit
TID CID tion
M
P0420 01H 01H Max. × —
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1)
P0420 02H 81H Min. × —
CATALYST
P0430 03H 02H Max. × —
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)
P0430 04H 82H Min. × —
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. × —
EVAP
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. × mV
SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. × —

Revision: June 2004 EC-67 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Test value (GST display) Applica-

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Unit
TID CID tion

P1278 45H 8EH Min. × 0.004

A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P1279 48H 8EH Min. × 0.004
P1288 50H 8FH Min. × 0.004
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P1289 53H 8FH Min. × 0.004
P0139 19H 86H Min. × mV/500ms
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) P1147 1AH 86H Min. × mV
P1146 1BH 06H Max. × mV
P0159 21H 87H Min. × mV/500ms
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) P1167 22H 87H Min. × mV
P1166 23H 07H Max. × mV
P1032 57H 10H Max. × mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
P1031 58H 90H Max. × mV
P1052 59H 11H Max. × mV
A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)
P1051 5AH 91H Max. × mV
HO2S HTR
P0038 2DH 0AH Max. × mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. × mV
P0058 2FH 0BH Max. × mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)
P0057 30H 8BH Min. × mV
P0400 31H 8CH Min. × mV
P0400 32H 8CH Min. × mV
EGR
EGR function P0400 33H 8CH Min. × mV
SYSTEM
P0400 34H 8CH Min. × mV
P1402 35H 0CH Max. × mV

HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION

How to Erase DTC
With CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “AT” (4-speed A/T models) or “TRANSMISSIION” (5-speed A/T models).
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

Revision: June 2004 EC-68 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

A

EC

J
SCIA5334E

With GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST. K
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. L
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-43, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" or AT-427, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" .
(The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) M
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-43, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" or AT-427, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)"
. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-71, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within
approx. 24 hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes

Revision: June 2004 EC-69 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

– Freeze frame data

– 1st trip freeze frame data
– System readiness test (SRT) codes
– Test values
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) UBS0091B

● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-98, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-
NATS)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be SEF543X

carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS
(NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS0091C

DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-41, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-685, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.

SEF217U

Revision: June 2004 EC-70 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following 3 functions. A
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
EC
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
ON position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
C

Engine stopped

Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip E
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
F
the 1st trip.
● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
● One trip detection diagnoses
G
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS

Engine stopped
I

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when there is J
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means K
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
L
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

NOTE: M
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.

Revision: June 2004 EC-71 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).

PBIB0092E

How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-71, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
41, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-685, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.

PBIA3905E

Revision: June 2004 EC-72 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds A
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
EC
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) C
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
72, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . D
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within approx 24
hours.
E
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
OBD System Operation Chart UBS0091D

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS F
● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
● When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are G
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-53, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
● The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when H
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
● The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and I
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. J
● The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
K
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no L
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data M
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-75 .
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-77 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

Revision: June 2004 EC-73 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

SEF392S

*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
freeze frame data will be cleared. without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.

Revision: June 2004 EC-74 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. EC
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) C

<Driving Pattern C>

Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: D
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: E
● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F). F
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) G
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F) H
● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. I
● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
J

Revision: June 2004 EC-75 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

SEF393S

*1: When the same malfunction is *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- detected in two consecutive trips, the
MIL will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) the 1st trip freeze frame data will be without the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

Revision: June 2004 EC-76 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY

DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A
<Driving Pattern A>

EC

G
AEC574

● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
● The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. H
● The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
I
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
J
● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
K

Revision: June 2004 EC-77 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

Trouble Diagnosis Introduction UBS0091E

INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.

MEF036D

It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.

SEF233G

A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-79 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-81 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.

Revision: June 2004 EC-78 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK FLOW
Flow Chart A

EC

PBIB1043E

*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system
RESULTS” is other than “0” or “[1t]”, form EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- cannot be performed, check main
perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAG- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT power supply and ground circuit.
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-140, "POWER SUPPLY
DENT" . CIRCUIT FOR ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be *5 EC-65, "Driving Pattern" *6 EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -
detected, perform EC-139, "TROU- SPECIFICATION VALUE"
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-79 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Description for Work Flow

STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
EC-80, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the
(1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-68 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip)
freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-90, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st
trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip)
DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.
The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .) Then per-
form inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-90, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-104 , EC-129 .
STEP VI
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in
GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is
STEP VII still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" and AT-42, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" or AT-426, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L

Revision: June 2004 EC-80 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A
Worksheet Sample

EC

MTBL0017

Revision: June 2004 EC-81 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS0091F

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0121 P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P1229 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P0128 Thermostat function
● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0403 EGR volume control valve
● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

Revision: June 2004 EC-82 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Priority Detected items (DTC)

A
2 ● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
● P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
● P0405 P0406 EGR temperature sensor
EC
● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
C
● P0451* P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater
D
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
E
● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1
F
● P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control G
● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
● P0300 - P0306 Misfire
● P0400 P1402 EGR system H
● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
● P0442 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
● P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) I
● P0456 EVAP control system (VERY SMALL LEAK)
● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
● P0705 - P0882 P1705 P1760 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches J
● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1211 TCS control unit
● P1212 TCS communication line K
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor L
*: Type II and type III vehicles

Revision: June 2004 EC-83 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Fail-safe Chart UBS0091G

When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121 Electric throttle control While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
actuator the engine stalls.
(ECM detect the throttle The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
valve is stuck open.) more.
P1122 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor.

● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting MIL up when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected, and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Revision: June 2004 EC-84 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Basic Inspection UBS0091H

1. INSPECTION START A

1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance. EC
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
D
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U

– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge. G
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U
J
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. L

M
SEF977U

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-85 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

SEF978U

3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

SEF058Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 5.

5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-86 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A

Refer to EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4. C

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

D
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
F
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm H
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
J
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. K
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-281 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-275 .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4. M

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-98, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .

>> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-87 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 12.

12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 13.

13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Refer to EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.

14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
M/T: 625 ± 50 rpm
4-speed A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T: 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.

Revision: June 2004 EC-88 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
EC
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG C
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 16.
D
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
F
2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

G
Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-281 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-275 . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. I
2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION J

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is the rarely the case.)
K
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-98, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" .
L
>> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-89 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Matrix Chart UBS0091I

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-655
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-51
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-649
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-687
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-700
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-85
EC-417,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-419
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-85
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-629
EGR EGR volume control valve circuit 2 EC-297
2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 EC-289,
EGR system 2 1
EC-545
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-140
EC-164,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-172
1
EC-183,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-201
EC-398,
EC-481 ,
3 EC-488 ,
EC-495 ,
A/F sensor 1 circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-504 ,
EC-513 ,
EC-521 ,
EC-533
EC-195,
EC-257 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-473 ,
EC-475 ,
2 2 EC-617
EC-605,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 EC-611 ,
EC-623
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-270

Revision: June 2004 EC-90 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL
E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-275
F
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-281
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-384
G
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-390
EC-395,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-406 H
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-410
cuit
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-587 I
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 1 EC-595
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-666
J
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-671
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ATC-30
BRC-53 or K
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4
BRC-96
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-91 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank FL-9
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-39
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-15
Air cleaner EM-15
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-15
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-17
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-17,
Collector/Gasket EM-24
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-24
Starter circuit 3 SC-10
1
Signal plate 6 EM-121
PNP switch AT-106 or
4
AT-474
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-99
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-121
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft

Revision: June 2004 EC-92 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SYMPTOM
A

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

EC

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference C

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page

IDLING VIBRATION
D

ENGINE STALL
E

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Valve Timing chain EM-56
F
mecha-
Camshaft EM-80
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-56
G
Intake valve
3 EM-99
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ H
Gasket EM-26, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-30, LU-
I
tion filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 8 , LU-9 ,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-13
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-6 J
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-12
Thermostat 5 CO-24
K
Water pump CO-19
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-26
Coolant level (Low)/Contami-
5 CO-10
L
nated coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — EC-70 or
1 1
NATS) BL-98 M
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

Revision: June 2004 EC-93 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS0091J

BBIA0213E

Revision: June 2004 EC-94 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC

BBIA0261E

Revision: June 2004 EC-95 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

BBIA0262E

Revision: June 2004 EC-96 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC

BBIA0263E

Revision: June 2004 EC-97 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

PBIB1686E

Revision: June 2004 EC-98 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC

BBIA0264E

Revision: June 2004 EC-99 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

BBIA0265E

Revision: June 2004 EC-100 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC

BBIA0266E

Revision: June 2004 EC-101 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Circuit Diagram UBS0091K

BBWA0606E

Revision: June 2004 EC-102 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC

BBWA0607E

Revision: June 2004 EC-103 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS0091L

MBIB0045E

ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS0091M

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection,
remove glove box.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.

BBIA0231E

3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.

● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

BBIA0282E

ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Body ground
● Idle speed

Approximately 5V

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G/B ● Warm-up condition
(Bank 2)
● Idle speed

PBIB1584E

Revision: June 2004 EC-104 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 R [Ignition switch: ON]
relay power supply (11 - 14V) EC
0 - 14V

[Ignition switch: ON]

C
Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 O/L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
D
PBIB1104E

0 - 14V
E
[Ignition switch: ON]
Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
5 W/L
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) F
● Accelerator pedal is depressing

PBIB1105E
G
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
H
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
6 L/R
heater (Bank 2) minute under no load. I
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) J
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
K
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition L
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing con- M

PBIB1037E
10 V/W trol solenoid valve (Bank
2)
7 - 12V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1038E

Revision: June 2004 EC-105 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing con-

PBIB1037E
11 P/L trol solenoid valve (Bank
1)
7 - 12V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1038E

[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel is being turned.
12 W
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.

Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB1041E
Crankshaft position sen-
13 G
sor (POS)
Approximately 10V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1042E

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sen-
14 W
sor (PHASE) (Bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1040E

Revision: June 2004 EC-106 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed EC
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition C
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
17 G/Y D
18 Y/B EGR volume control [Engine is running]
0.1 - 14V
19 W/B valve ● Idle speed
20 LG/R
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] F
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
G
21 L/W Injector No. 5 SEC984C
22 R/Y Injector No. 3
23 R/B Injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
H
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition I
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

J
SEC985C

Approximately 5V
K
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
24 V ● Warm-up condition
(Bank 1)
● Idle speed L

PBIB1584E

[Engine is running] M
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
25 P/B
heater (Bank 1) minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
VIAS control solenoid
29 Y/B [Engine is running]
valve
● Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 0 - 1.0V
rpm.

Revision: June 2004 EC-107 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system
32 BR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
pressure sensor

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

PBIB1039E
Camshaft position sen-
33 W
sor (PHASE) (Bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1040E

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature
34 V/O [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

40 V/R Injector No. 6 SEC984C

41 G/W Injector No. 4
42 R/W Injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

SEC985C

[Engine is running]
0 - 3V
Electronic controlled ● Idle speed (With engine stopped)
44 O
engine mount-1 [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except above conditions (11 - 14V)

Revision: June 2004 EC-108 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) EC

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed C

EVAP canister purge vol- SEC990C D

45 V/R ume control solenoid
valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
E
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
F

SEC991C

Throttle position sensor

G
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply
EVAP control system
48 G pressure sensor power [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V H
supply
Refrigerant pressure sen-
49 BR/W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor power supply I
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) J
● Accelerator pedal fully released
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped K
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
L
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V
● Idle speed
51 G/O Mass air flow sensor M
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.7 - 2.4V
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
[Ignition switch: ON] Less than 4.5V
[Engine is running]
54 V/W EGR temperature sensor
● Warm-up condition 0 - 1.5V
● EGR system is operating.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 L 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 2) met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.

Revision: June 2004 EC-109 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V

0 - 0.4V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

60 P/W Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C

61 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
62 BR/R Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.6V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

SEC987C

[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

Electronic controlled ● Idle speed (With engine stopped) (11 - 14V)
63 W/R
engine mount-2 [Engine is running]
0 - 3.0V
● Except above conditions
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sen-
sor / PSP sensor / EVAP [Engine is running]
67 B control system pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor / ASCD steering ● Idle speed
switch / Refrigerant pres-
sure sensor)
68 L/Y PSP sensor power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure sen- ● Warm-up condition
70 W 1.0 - 4.0V
sor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tempera-
73 Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
engine coolant temperature.

Revision: June 2004 EC-110 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition EC
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 1) met.
C
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
D
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
E
0 - 0.4V

[Engine is running]
F
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

G
79 GR/R Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C
80 GR Ignition signal No. 4
81 G/R Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.6V
H
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. I

SEC987C

J
[Engine is running]
82 GR APP sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
K
[Engine is running]
83 G APP sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
L
[Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
85 LG Data link connector
● CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. age (11 - 14V)

Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V M

86 Y CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
LG/R (A/T) APP sensor 1 power sup-
90 [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
LG (M/T) ply
APP sensor 2 power sup-
91 P [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
ply
Approximately 2.5 - 3.2V
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.45V
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 V
tion sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Revision: June 2004 EC-111 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 4V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
● ON/OFF switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2V
● COAST/SET switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 3V
● ACCEL/RES switch: ON
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 0V
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
102 G/W PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor [Ignition switch: OFF]
104 O (11 - 14V)
relay
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.95V
Accelerator pedal posi- ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
tion sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Fuel tank temperature
107 R/L [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sensor
tank temperature.
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is fully released (11 - 14V)
108 G/R ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is depressed
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
109 R/W Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF

Revision: June 2004 EC-112 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V EC
[Engine is running]
113 B/O Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON

115 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground D
116 B ● Idle speed
EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 R/Y [Ignition switch: ON]
trol valve (11 - 14V)
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
E
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 W/L [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V) F
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

CONSULT-II Function (ECM) UBS0091N G

CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
ECM diagnostic mode Description
H
Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ECM for setting the sta-
WORK SUPPORT tus suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ECM and received
data is displayed.
I
Self-diagnostic results results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
frame data can be read and erased quickly.*
DATA MONITOR Displays ECM input/output data in real time.
J
Displays ECM input/output data of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback
DATA MONITOR (SPEC)
control value and the other data monitor items can be read.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
K
ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or L
FUNCTION TEST
"NG".
ECM PART NUMBER ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. M
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● System readiness test (SRT) codes
● Test values
● Others

Revision: June 2004 EC-113 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK
PORT DTC* 1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
A/F sensor 1 × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × ×
Vehicle speed sensor × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
× × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

Throttle position sensor

Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × ×
EVAP control system pressure
× × ×
sensor
Intake air temperature sensor × × × ×
INPUT

EGR temperature sensor × × ×

Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Load signal × ×
Fuel level sensor × × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×

Revision: June 2004 EC-114 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS DATA CONFIRMATION
Item WORK DATA
MONI- ACTIVE DTC
SUP- FREEZE MONI-
TOR TEST SRT WORK EC
PORT DTC* 1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC) STATUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Injectors × × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×
D
Throttle control motor ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS

EVAP canister purge volume con-

× × × × ×
trol solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay × ×
Fuel pump relay × × × ×
OUTPUT

Cooling fan relay × × × × F

EGR volume control valve × × × ×
A/F sensor 1 heater × × × ×
G
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × ×
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid H
× × × ×
valve
VIAS control solenoid valve × × × ×
Electronic controlled engine mount × × × I
Calculated load value × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. J
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-59 .

CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE K

CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the M
hood opener handle.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0002E

Revision: June 2004 EC-115 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

BCIA0029E

5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-36, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .

SEF995X

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.

PBIB2308E

WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.

Revision: June 2004 EC-116 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

A
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
● IGN SW “ON” EC
● ENGINE NOT RUNNING
● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS- C
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
● WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS- D
TEM CLOSE”
● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
E
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY F
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
G
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. H
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
I
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer toEC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data J
Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer
CODE K
to EC-10, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed. L
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 “MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop M
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRIM-B2 [%]
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]

Revision: June 2004 EC-117 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Freeze frame data

Description
item*
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.

DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
● Indicates the engine speed computed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
sensor (POS) and camshaft position sen-
sor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value may
be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor is displayed. value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- value is indicated.
back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
● When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × mined by the signal voltage of the engine enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
[°C] or [°F]
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × ● The A/F signal computed from the input
A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.

HO2S2 (B1) [V] × ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen

HO2S2 (B2) [V] × sensor 2 is displayed.

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) ● Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:

×
[RICH/LEAN] RICH ... means the amount of oxygen
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
after three way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) value is indicated.
× LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
[RICH/LEAN] after three way catalyst is relatively large.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
× × vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor sig-
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × nal voltage is displayed.

THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage

THRTL SEN 2 [V] × is displayed.

● The fuel temperature (determined by the

FUEL T/TEMP SE
× signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature
[°C] or [°F]
sensor) is displayed.

Revision: June 2004 EC-118 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The intake air temperature (determined EC
INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air tem-
[°C] or [°F]
perature sensor) is indicated.
EGR TEMP SEN ● The signal voltage of EGR temperature
× × C
[V] sensor is displayed.
EVAP SYS PRES ● The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
×
[V] tem pressure sensor is displayed.
D
FUEL LEVEL SE ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor
×
[V] is displayed.
● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF]
START SIGNAL computed by the ECM according to the ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis- E
× ×
[ON/OFF] signals of engine speed and battery volt- played regardless of the starter signal.
age.

CLSD THL POS

● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com- F
× × puted by ECM according to the accelera-
[ON/OFF]
tor pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air G
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
× × H
[ON/OFF] park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
PW/ST SIGNAL system (determined by the signal voltage
× ×
[ON/OFF] of the power steering pressure sensor I
signal) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal. J
ON ... Rear window defogger switch is
LOAD SIGNAL
× × ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd posi-
[ON/OFF]
tion.
OFF ... Both rear window defogger switch K
and lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
[ON/OFF] tion switch signal. L
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater
[ON/OFF] fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the M
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
× ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
[msec] ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
width compensated by ECM according to
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
the input signals.
[msec]
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
×
[BTDC] ECM according to the input signals. value is indicated.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the
CAL/LD VALUE [%] value of the current air flow divided by
peak air flow.
● Indicates the mass air flow computed by
MASS AIRFLOW
ECM according to the signal voltage of
[g·m/s]
the mass air flow sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-119 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
● Indicates the EGR volume control value
computed by the ECM according to the
EGR VOL CON/V
× input signals.
[%]
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
INT/V TIM (B1)
[°CA] ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM (B2) advanced angle.
[°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ● The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
INT/V SOL (B2) [%] ON ... intake valve timing control is oper-
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
● The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indi-
VIAS S/V cated.
[ON/OFF] ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is not
operating.
● The air conditioner relay control condition
AIR COND RLY
× (determined by ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals) is indicated.
● The control condition of the electronic
controlled engine mount (determined by
ENGINE MOUNT ECM according to the input signals) is
[IDLE/TRVL] indicated.
IDLE ... Idle condition
TRVL ... Driving condition
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
FUEL PUMP RLY
× dition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
● The control condition of the EVAP canis-
ter vent control valve (determined by
VENT CONT/V ECM according to the input signals) is
[ON/OFF] indicated.
ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.

Revision: June 2004 EC-120 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT A
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● The control condition of the cooling fan EC
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals) is indicated.
[HI/MID/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation C
OFF ... Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by D
HO2S2 HTR (B2) ECM according to the input signals.
[ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD ● Indicates the engine speed computed E
[rpm] from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
F
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully. G
TRVL AFTER MIL
● Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
[km] or [mile]
A/F S1 HTR (B1) ● Indicates A/F sensor 1 heater control H
[%] value computed by ECM according to the
input signals.
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● The current flow to the heater becomes
[%] larger as the value increases. I
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
J
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
SET VHCL SPD K
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [m.p.h.]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] CRUISE switch signal. L
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN-
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from M
[ON/OFF] ACCEL/RES switch signal.
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] COAST/SET switch signal.
BRAKE SW1 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
[ON/OFF] brake switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
VHCL SPD CUT the ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT ...Vehicle speed increased to exces-
sively high compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.

Revision: June 2004 EC-121 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM
MAIN
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS
NALS
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
LO SPEED CUT the ASCD set speed.
[NON/CUT] CUT ...Vehicle speed decreased to
excessively low compared with the ASCD
set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D ● For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
AT OD MONITOR
according to the input signal from the played.
[ON/OFF]
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D ● For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM. played.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
CRUISE LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
SET LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], ● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
[Hz] or [%] be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
width measured by the probe. They are the same figures as an actual
DUTY-LOW
piece of data which was just previously
PLS WIDTH-HI measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signal of the crankshaft position
ENG SPEED [rpm] × ×
sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
× back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the
cated.
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

Revision: June 2004 EC-122 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item A
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors EC
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
C
● Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Timing light: Set ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using D
CONSULT-II.

● Engine: After warming up, idle ● Harness and connectors

the engine. ● Compression E
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever: N ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Spark plugs F
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors G
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”, Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
“LOW” and “OFF” using CON-
SULT-II. ● IPDM E/R

● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors H

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injectors I
● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and ing sound.
J
● Fuel pump relay
OFF using CONSULT-II and lis-
ten to operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON K
(Engine stopped)
EGR VOL EGR volume control valve makes ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V ● Change the EGR volume control an operating sound. ● EGR volume control valve
valve opening step using CON-
SULT-II. L
● Ignition switch: ON
● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF Solenoid valve makes the operating ● Harness and connectors
VIAS SOL VALVE
using CONSULT-II and listen to sound. ● Solenoid valve M
operating sound.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at idle speed. Body vibration changes according ● Harness and connectors
ENGINE
● Turn electronic controlled engine to the electronic controlled engine ● Electronic controlled engine
MOUNTING
mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with mount condition. mount
the CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP
● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
SEN

Revision: June 2004 EC-123 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

● Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
TROL/V ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF sound. ● Solenoid valve
with the CONSULT-II and listen
to operating sound.
● Engine: Return to the original
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-60, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
PURGE FLOW P0441 EC-314
EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-319
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-368
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-552
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-513
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1286 EC-513
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 Refer to corresponding EC-219
trouble diagnosis for
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 DTC. EC-435
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-447
H02S2
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-219
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-435
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-447
EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-289
EGR SYSTEM
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-545
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to A34 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.

Revision: June 2004 EC-124 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description A
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): EC
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be C
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording D
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... E
PBIB1593E
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and F
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): G
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though H
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X

Revision: June 2004 EC-125 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/
1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-25, "How to Perform
Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

PBIB0197E

Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS0091O

DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.

SEF139P

Revision: June 2004 EC-126 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
A

This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
EC
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-117, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze
Frame Data" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored C
MODE 3 DTCs
by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) D
● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
● Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) E
● Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
● Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
F
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific com-
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
ponents/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related pow-
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) ertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving condi- G
tions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed. H
● EVAP canister vent control valve open
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
● Low ambient temperature I
MODE 8 —
● Low battery voltage
● Engine running
● Ignition switch OFF J
● Low fuel temperature
● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such K
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.

GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
M
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0002E

Revision: June 2004 EC-127 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in

the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)

SEF398S

5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.

SEF416S

Revision: June 2004 EC-128 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS0091P

Remarks: A
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in EC
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the C
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.1 - 1.5V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF D
MAS A/F SE-B1
● Shift lever: N(A/T), Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.4V
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
E
● Shift lever: N(A/T), Neutral (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 4.0 msec
● No load
F

A/F ALPHA-B1 Maintaining engine speed at 2,000

● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rpm
G
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) rpm
H
● Warm-up condition

HO2S2 (B1) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for rpm quickly. 1.0V
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute I
under no load.
● Warm-up condition
● After keeping engine speed J
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) rpm quickly.
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
K
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V L
ACCEL SEN1 ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN2* (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V M
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
EGR TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up,
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
idle the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF

Revision: June 2004 EC-129 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
idle the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON

● Engine: After warming up, Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
idle the engine Heater fan is not operating. OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B2 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 13° - 18° BTDC
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
IGN TIMING
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm —
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
EGR VOLCON/V Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 10 - 55 step
rpm quickly
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INT/V TIM (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
● No load
1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up
Except above conditions OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
● Engine: After warming up
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
idle the engine ON
(Compressor operates)

Revision: June 2004 EC-130 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

A
Idle (With engine stopped) IDLE
ENGINE MOUNT ● Engine: Running
Except above conditions TRVL
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON EC
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF C
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF D
(201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C LOW
● Engine: After warming up, (210°F) E
COOLING FAN idle the engine
Engine coolant temperature is
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C MID
(219°F) F
Engine coolant temperature is 105°C
HI
(221°F) or more
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. G
– Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load H
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Almost the same speed as the
I/P PULLY SPD ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
speedometer indication I
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) J
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle K
1.0 - 4.0V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE L
indication. speedometer indication
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating.
displayed.
CRUISE switch: Depressed ON M
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Depressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
ACCEL/RES switch: Depressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Depressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
BRAKE SW1 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
CRUISE switch pressed ON
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch released OFF

Revision: June 2004 EC-131 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● CRUISE switch: ON COAST/SET switch pressed ON

SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h COAST/SET switch released OFF
(89 MPH)
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.

Revision: June 2004 EC-132 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS0091Q

A
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
C

F
PBIB0198E

ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” G
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
H

SEF241Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-133 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

PBIB1594E

Revision: June 2004 EC-134 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031

A
Description UBS0091R

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) E

Testing Condition UBS0091S

● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) F

2
● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
G
● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2 H
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). I
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead. J
Inspection Procedure UBS0091T

NOTE:
K
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. L
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
M
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-136, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF601Z

Revision: June 2004 EC-135 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0091U

SEF613ZD

Revision: June 2004 EC-136 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

EC

SEF614Z

Revision: June 2004 EC-137 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

SEF615ZA

Revision: June 2004 EC-138 2004 Maxima

 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006

A
Description UBS0091V

Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area. C

Common I/I Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0091W F

1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G
TION" .

>> GO TO 2. H

2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”,
“Ground Inspection”.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
K
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION L
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-22, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-139 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110

Wiring Diagram UBS0091X

BBWA0608E

Revision: June 2004 EC-140 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V C
109 R/W Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B E
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
F
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

Revision: June 2004 EC-141 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

BBWA0609E

Revision: June 2004 EC-142 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed

115 B [Engine is running]

ECM ground Engine ground
116 B ● Idle speed D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0091Y

1. INSPECTION START E

Start engine.
Is engine running?
F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
G
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. H
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. J
NG >> GO TO 3.

K
MBIB0015E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
M
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-143 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-148, "Ground Inspection" .

BBIA0468E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-144 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with EC
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
C
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-629, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8. D

E
PBIB1585E

8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

F
1. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester. G
Voltage: After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. I
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
17. PBIB1630E

J
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
K
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 12. M

PBIB1191E

10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 11.
Revision: June 2004 EC-145 2004 Maxima
 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness or connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness or connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

14. CHECK 15A FUSE

1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.

15. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

Revision: June 2004 EC-146 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

C
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. E

Revision: June 2004 EC-147 2004 Maxima

 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM

Ground Inspection EBS00KJ1

Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
● Remove the ground bolt or screw.
● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
● Clean as required to assure good contact.
● Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-27, "Ground Distribution" .

PBIB1870E

Revision: June 2004 EC-148 2004 Maxima

 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710

A
Description UBS0091Z

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00920

D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name

U1000*1 ● ECM cannot communicate to other control E

1000*1 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line ECM cannot communicate for more than the
U1001*2 ●
shorted)
specified time.
1001*2 F
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00921

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-151, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-149 2004 Maxima

 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram UBS00922

BBWA0610E

Revision: June 2004 EC-150 2004 Maxima

 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00923

A
Go to LAN-6, "PRECAUTIONS" .

EC

Revision: June 2004 EC-151 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796

Description UBS00924

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed

PBIB1389E

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00925

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INT/V TIM (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
● No load

Revision: June 2004 EC-152 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00926

A
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 EC
0011 ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
(Bank 1) Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0021 control performance phase-control angle degree. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up C
0021 portion of the camshaft
(Bank 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE D
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
E
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00927

F
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for G
DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-410, "DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE" .
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle. I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. J
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive sec- K
onds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
L
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
SEF353Z
Selector lever P or N position M
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-153 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00928

1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-280, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-288, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

Check the following.
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.

SEC905C

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-276 for CKP sensor (POS) and EC-282 for CMP sensor (PHASE).

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-154 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0

A
Description UBS00929

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, D
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
E
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. F
● Engine: After warming up
ON
● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
G
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0092A

Specification data are reference values.

H
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. I
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2) – Engine: After warming up
ON
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load J

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0092B

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater L
P0057 heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
0057 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)
M
P0038
0038 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen- ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to circuit is shorted.)
P0058 heater control circuit high
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
0058 heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
(Bank 2)

Revision: June 2004 EC-155 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0092C

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-161, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF176Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under
no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under
no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Select MODE 3 with GST.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-161, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using
CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. There-
fore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

Revision: June 2004 EC-156 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Wiring Diagram UBS0092D

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0615E

Revision: June 2004 EC-157 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
25 P/B
heater (bank 1) minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: June 2004 EC-158 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

BANK 2
A

EC

BBWA0616E

Revision: June 2004 EC-159 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
– Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0V
– Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
6 L/R
heater (bank 2) minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: June 2004 EC-160 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0092E

1. CHECK HO2S2 HEATER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC

J
BBIA0257E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

K
4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. M

PBIB1595E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-161 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

3. CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 25 1 1
P0057, P0058 6 1 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Refer to EC-162, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS0092F

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
1 and 4 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
2 and 1, 3, 4 ∞Ω
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

PBIB1596E

Revision: June 2004 EC-162 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Removal and Installation UBS0092G

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC

Revision: June 2004 EC-163 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680

Component Description UBS0092H

The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the
intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PBIB1604E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0092I

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.1 - 1.5V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS A/F SE-B1
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.4V
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0092J

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM (The sensor circuit is open or
A) shorted.)
under light load driving condition.
Mass air flow sensor cir- ● Mass air flow sensor
P0101
cuit range/performance ● Harness or connectors
0101
problem (The sensor circuit is open or
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM shorted.)
B)
under heavy load driving condition.
● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor

Revision: June 2004 EC-164 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0092K

A
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A C
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
D
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. E
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F

SEF174Y H
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
I
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
L
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
M
increases.
If NG, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.

SEF243Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-165 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-

onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0199E

Overall Function Check UBS0092L

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select MODE 1 with GST.
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with MODE 1.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5. If NG, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF534P

Revision: June 2004 EC-166 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0092M

EC

BBWA0619E

Revision: June 2004 EC-167 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V
● Idle speed
51 G/O Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.7 - 2.4V
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0092N

1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

Revision: June 2004 EC-168 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
EC
>> GO TO 4.

BBIA0232E
E
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
F
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0035E
I
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
J
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. K
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1597E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

Check the following.

● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-169 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-170 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Component Inspection UBS0092O

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor EC
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V C
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.5
operating temperature.) D
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.7 - 2.4
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.1 - 1.5 to Approx. 2.4 E
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. F
● Turn ignition switch OFF.

● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.

● Perform steps 2 and 3 again.

G
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. H
Removal and Installation UBS0092P

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-15, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . I

Revision: June 2004 EC-171 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680

Component Description UBS0092Q

The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the
intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PBIB1604E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0092R

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.1 - 1.5V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS A/F SE-B1
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.4V
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
CAL/LD VALUE
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
MASS AIRFLOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
● No load

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0092S

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor
● Harness or connectors
P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 high input sent to ECM.
● Mass air flow sensor

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

Revision: June 2004 EC-172 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0092T

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D

F
SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G

PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103

With CONSULT-II H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. I
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. J
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

L
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-173 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0092U

BBWA0619E

Revision: June 2004 EC-174 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V
● Idle speed
51 G/O Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running] D
● Warm-up condition 1.7 - 2.4V
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
Sensors' ground E
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
F
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
[Engine is running] G
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B H
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF I
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)
J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0092V

1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? K
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2. L

2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

M
Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

Revision: June 2004 EC-175 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 4.

BBIA0232E

4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0035E

3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1597E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-176 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
F
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and TCM
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
9. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" .
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
M
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-177 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

Component Inspection UBS0092W

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.5
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.7 - 2.4
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.1 - 1.5 to Approx. 2.4
PBIB1106E
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
● Turn ignition switch OFF.
● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.

● Perform steps 2 and 3 again.

5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation UBS0092X

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer toEM-15, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-178 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS0092Y

The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to EC
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C

PBIB1604E

E
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0092Z

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor
● Harness or connectors
0112 circuit low input is sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor K
0113 circuit high input is sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00930

L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-181, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-179 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00931

BBWA0620E

Revision: June 2004 EC-180 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00932

1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor EC
is built-into) harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
C

BBIA0035E
E

4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2 and

ground. F
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
H

PBIB1598E

I
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal K
42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. L
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. M
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between intake air temperature sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between intake air temperature sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-182, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

Revision: June 2004 EC-181 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer toEC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00933

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 1 and
2 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).

PBIB1604E

SEF012P

Removal and Installation UBS00934

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-15, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-182 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS00935

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the EC
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. C

SEF594K

E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ F
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 G
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 H
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P

CAUTION:
I
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00936
J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
K
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0117 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Engine coolant temperature sensor L
0118 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. M
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)

Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
START
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

Revision: June 2004 EC-183 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00937

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-186, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-184 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00938

EC

BBWA0621E

Revision: June 2004 EC-185 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00939

1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0036E

4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0080E

2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connectors.
4. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM
● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-186 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Component Inspection UBS0093A

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR C

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
D

F
PBIB0081E

<Reference data> G
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 H
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
I
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P J
Removal and Installation UBS0093B

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" . K

Revision: June 2004 EC-187 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

DTC P0121 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

Component Description EBS00HZR

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00HZS

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00HZT

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

NOTE:
If DTC P0121 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the displayed other
DTC.
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Check Items (Possible Cause)
name
● Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM ● Electric throttle control actuator
A) (TP sensor 1 and 2)
under light load driving condition.
● Fuel injector
Throttle position
P0121 sensor circuit ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
0121 range/perfor- ● Mass air flow sensor
mance problem
● Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM shorted.)
B)
under heavy load driving condition. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
● Intake air leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00HZU

If DTC P0121 is detected, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If there is no problem on
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: June 2004 EC-188 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. A
If idle speed is over 1,000 rpm, maintain the following conditions
for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed below 1,000 rpm.
Selector lever Suitable position except P or N position
EC

Brake pedal Depressed

Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)
C
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF058Y

D
With GST
Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B E
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II F
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
G
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select "AUTO TRIG" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CON-
SULT-II.
H
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm I
MAS A/F SE-B1 More than 3V
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
J
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine SEF178Y
Driving location load) will help maintain the driving condi-
tions required for this test. K

6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST L
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-
onds.
Gear position Suitable position M
Engine speed More than 2,000 rpm
Engine coolant temperature More than 70°C (158°F)
Voltage between ECM terminal 51
(Mass air flow sensor signal) and More than 3V
ground

2. If DTC is detected, go to EC-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB1106E

Revision: June 2004 EC-189 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram EBS00HZV

WBWA0075E

Revision: June 2004 EC-190 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle position sensor C
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped D
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON] E
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed F
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed G
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V H
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON] I
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed J
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00HZW

1. INSPECTION START K
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
Malfunction A or B
L
Malfunction A>> GO TO 4.
Malfunction B>> GO TO 2.

2. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING M

Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following connections.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold collector
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

Revision: June 2004 EC-191 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

4. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 5.

BBIA0232E

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0233E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.

PBIB0082E

6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-192 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-194, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK (Malfunction A in step 1)>> GO TO 10.
OK (Malfunction B in step 1)>> GO TO 13. F
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR G

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
H
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END I

10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" . J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. K

11. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

L
Refer to EC-288, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. M
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

12. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

Refer to EC-654, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-193 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0121 TP SENSOR

Component Inspection EBS00HZX

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1060E

step.
7. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation EBS00HZY

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-194 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS0093C

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0093D

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0093E

H

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

NOTE:
I
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the displayed other
DTC.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0122 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor ● Harness or connectors
0122 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen-
K
● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 2 circuit high input sor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)

L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-195 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0093F

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-198, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-196 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0093G

EC

WBWA0068E

Revision: June 2004 EC-197 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle position sensor
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1ST (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0093H

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-198 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

D
BBIA0233E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-200, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-199 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS0093I

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1060E

step.
7. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS0093J

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-200 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS0093K

NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC
P0118. Refer to EC-183, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant C
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases. D

SEF594K

F
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F) G
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
H
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 I
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0093L
K
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
L
● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not ● Harness or connectors
Insufficient engine coolant practical, even when some time has passed (High resistance in the circuit)
P0125 after starting the engine.
temperature for closed
0125 ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
loop fuel control ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for M
closed loop fuel control. ● Thermostat

Revision: June 2004 EC-201 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0093M

CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-202, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0093N

1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-203, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

2. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION

When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .

3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Refer to EC-185, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-202 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

Component Inspection UBS0093O

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
EC

D
PBIB0081E

<Reference data> E

Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
F
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. H
SEF012P

Removal and Installation UBS0093P

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-203 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630

Component Description UBS0093Q

The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.

PBIB1604E

<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0093R

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors

P0127 Intake air temperature (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. ● Intake air temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0093S

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: June 2004 EC-204 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR

b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

c. Check the engine coolant temperature. A
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
● Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera- EC
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con- SEF058Y

secutive seconds. D
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-205, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST E
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0093T
F
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-205, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
H
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I
Refer to EC-180, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection UBS0093U

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi- K
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
L
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor). M

PBIB1604E

SEF012P

Revision: June 2004 EC-205 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR

Removal and Installation UBS0093V

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EM-15, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-206 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0093W

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough. EC
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
C
● Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not
P0128 ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
Thermostat function reach to specified temperature even though
0128 stat
the engine has run long enough.
● Engine coolant temperature sensor D

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0093X

NOTE: E
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: F
● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II G
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .
Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may
come on. H
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
I
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), stop engine and cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry
from step 1. J
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) K
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-207, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST L
1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0093Y
M
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-208, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-207 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION

Component Inspection UBS0093Z

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Check resistance as shown in the figure.

SEF152P

<Reference data>
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

SEF012P

Removal and Installation UBS00940

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMOSTAT HOUSING" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-208 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS00AOA

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AOB

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Warm-up condition
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm rpm quickly. G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) for 1 minute and at idle for 1 LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) minute under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AOC

H

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the I
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. J

SEF305UA

L
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0138
0138 M
● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0158 2 circuit high voltage sent to ECM.
● Heated oxygen sensor 2
0158
(Bank 2)

Revision: June 2004 EC-209 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AOD

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-214, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-210 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Wiring Diagram UBS00AOE

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0617E

Revision: June 2004 EC-211 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 1) met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed

Revision: June 2004 EC-212 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

BANK 2
A

EC

BBWA0618E

Revision: June 2004 EC-213 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 L 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Bank 2) met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AOF

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-214 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
EC

BBIA0257E
J
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-215 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 2 1
P0158 55 2 2

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 2 1
P0158 55 2 2

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Check HO2S2 connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-217, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-216 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Component Inspection UBS00AOG

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II. EC
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. D

SEF174Y
E
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
F

PBIB1672E

7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. I
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
J

PBIB1210E
M
TYPE III VEHICLES

PBIB2298E

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehicles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at
least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

Revision: June 2004 EC-217 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehi-
cles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least once during this pro-
cedure.
If the voltage is above 0.70V (type I and type III vehicles),
0.78V (type III vehicles) at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T PBIB1607E
models).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation UBS00948

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-218 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS00949

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0094A

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Warm-up condition
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for quickly. G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0094B

H
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer I
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition J
such as fuel-cut.

SEF302U

L
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0139 ● Harness or connectors
0139 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) M
(Bank 1) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond
P0159 2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. ● Fuel pressure
0159 ● Injectors
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

Revision: June 2004 EC-219 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0094C

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

PBIB0115E

9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check UBS0094D

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-220 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times. A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
EC
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D C
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T
models). PBIB1607E
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec- D
ond during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E

Revision: June 2004 EC-221 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

Wiring Diagram UBS0094E

BANK 1

BBWA0617E

Revision: June 2004 EC-222 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L
(Bank 1)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Revision: June 2004 EC-223 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

BANK 2

BBWA0618E

Revision: June 2004 EC-224 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 L
(Bank 2)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0094F

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H

>> GO TO 2.
I

BBIA0232E K

Revision: June 2004 EC-225 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-231, "DTC
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-240, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" .
No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-226 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC

J
BBIA0257E

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 3.

Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for shirt to ground or short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

Revision: June 2004 EC-227 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 2 1
P0159 55 2 2

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 2 1
P0159 55 2 2

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-228, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS0094G

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

SEF174Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-228 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A

EC

PBIB1672E

D
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
E

PBIB1210E H
TYPE III VEHICLES

PBIB2298E

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehicles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at L
least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: M
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-229 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehi-
cles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least once during this pro-
cedure.
If the voltage is above 0.70V (type I and type III vehicles),
0.78V (type III vehicles) at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T PBIB1607E
models).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation UBS0094H

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-230 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0094I

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
C
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
D

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0171 ● Intake air leaks E
0171 ● A/F sensor 1
(Bank 1)
● Injectors
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system too ● Exhaust gas leaks F
lean ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 ● Lack of fuel
(Bank 2)
● Mass air flow sensor G
● Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0094J

H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
I
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. J
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. K
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this L
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-235, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system M
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to EC-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not SEF968Y
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

Revision: June 2004 EC-231 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
9. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BBIA0035E

10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system

has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

Revision: June 2004 EC-232 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram UBS0094K

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0622E

Revision: June 2004 EC-233 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

BANK 2

BBWA0623E

Revision: June 2004 EC-234 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0094L

1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A

1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC

E
PBIB1216E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. I

Revision: June 2004 EC-235 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist.

6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: June 2004 EC-236 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-655, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC
● Fuel lines
● Fuel filter for clogging
C

>> Repair or replace.

6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts. E
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling F
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
G
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling H
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
engine grounds. Refer to EC-164, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
J

Revision: June 2004 EC-237 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

PBIB0133E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

MEC703B

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC-649, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .

8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-39, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors
on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones. SEF595Q

Revision: June 2004 EC-238 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Revision: June 2004 EC-239 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0094M

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensors 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0172 ● A/F sensor 1
0172
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system too
● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Incorrect fuel pressure
0175
(Bank 2) ● Mass air flow sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0094N

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-244, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-244, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine SEF968Y
does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.

Revision: June 2004 EC-240 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. EC
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Select MODE 3 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. C
6. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
D
8. Select MODE 7 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-244, "Diagnostic Procedure" . BBIA0035E
E
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-244, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and F
check for fouling, etc.

Revision: June 2004 EC-241 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram UBS0094O

BANK 1

BBWA0622E

Revision: June 2004 EC-242 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

BANK 2
A

EC

BBWA0623E

Revision: June 2004 EC-243 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0094P

1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: June 2004 EC-244 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

BBIA0235E
E
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal G
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
H
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

I
Continuity should exist.
5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
K
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6 L
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist. M

6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: June 2004 EC-245 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-655, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)

>> Repair or replace.

6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
engine grounds. Refer to EC-164, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-246 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. C

E
PBIB0133E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. F
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard. G

MEC703B

J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC-649, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
K
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-39, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . L
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. M
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-247 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630

Component Description UBS0094Q

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.

BBIA0081E

<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0094R

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
Fuel tank temperature
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit range/
0181 nals from engine coolant temperature sensor
performance ● Fuel tank temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0094S

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F). SEF174Y

6. Wait at least 10 seconds.

7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-251, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-248 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. A

EC

Revision: June 2004 EC-249 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0094T

BBWA0624E

Revision: June 2004 EC-250 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0094U

1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. A

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1" .
C
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
D
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
E

G
BBIA0236E

4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
J

PBIB0932E
K
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. L
● Harness connectors M81, B20
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
M
>> Repair harness or connector.

4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and “unified meter and
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: June 2004 EC-251 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B1, M11
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and “unified meter and A/C
amp.”

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS0094V

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90

PBIB0931E

Removal and Installation UBS0094W

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-252 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630

A
Component Description UBS0094X

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from EC
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases. C

BBIA0081E

E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance
F
°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0094Y

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0182 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
0183 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0094Z

L
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-255, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-253 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00950

BBWA0624E

Revision: June 2004 EC-254 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00951

1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. A

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1" .
C
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
D
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
E

G
BBIA0236E

4. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
J

PBIB0932E
K
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. L
● Harness connectors M81, B20
● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
M
>> Repair harness or connector.

4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and “unified meter and
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: June 2004 EC-255 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B1, M11
● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and “unified meter and A/C
amp.”

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-256, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00952

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90

PBIB0931E

Removal and Installation UBS00953

FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-256 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS00954

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00955

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00956

H

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0222 Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0222 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.) J
P0223 Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor ● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)

K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode L
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. M
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-257 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00957

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-260, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure WITH CONSULT-II above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-258 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00958

EC

WBWA0069E

Revision: June 2004 EC-259 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle position sensor
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00959

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-260 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

D
BBIA0233E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-262, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-261 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS0095A

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1060E

step.
7. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS0095B

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-262 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-

FIRE PFP:00000 A

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0095C

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank- EC
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire C

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) D
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change. E
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only G
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire ● Improper spark plug
Multiple cylinder misfire. I
0300 detected ● Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire ● Incorrect fuel pressure
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 detected ● The injector circuit is open or shorted
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire J
No. 2 cylinder misfires. ● Fuel injectors
0302 detected
● Intake air leak
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire ● The ignition signal circuit is open or
No. 3 cylinder misfires.
0303 detected shorted K
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire ● Lack of fuel
No. 4 cylinder misfires.
0304 detected ● Signal plate
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 L
No. 5 cylinder misfires.
0305 detected
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
P0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire
No. 6 cylinder misfires.
0306 detected M
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0095D

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

Revision: June 2004 EC-263 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing
the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the feeze frame data ± 10 km/h (5 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
(T) condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0095E

1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.

2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace it.

Revision: June 2004 EC-264 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST A

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
EC
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?

PBIB0133E
E
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time,
is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine F
speed drop?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4. G
No >> GO TO 7.

BBIA0237E

I
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
J
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-649,
K
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .

MEC703B
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-265 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK

1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-629, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

SEF575Q

6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS

Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to, MA-18, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum - Tipped Type)" .

SEF156I

7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-99, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

Revision: June 2004 EC-266 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-655, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) EC
● Fuel lines
● Fuel filter for clogging
C

>> Repair or replace.

10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING D

Check the following items. Refer to EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .

E
Items Specifications
M/T 625 ± 50 rpm
Target idle speed 4-speed A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F
5-speed A/T 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC
Ignition timing G
A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. H
NG >> Follow the EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-267 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

11. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-483, "Wiring Diagram" .
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist.

6. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors between ECM
and A/F sensor 1.

12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.

Revision: June 2004 EC-268 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE

13. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling EC
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST C
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm D

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. E
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
engine grounds. Refer to EC-164, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .

14. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-90, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or replace.
H
15. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE I
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

>> GO TO 16. J

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

K
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END L

Revision: June 2004 EC-269 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0327, P0328 KS

DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060

Component Description UBS0095F

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.

BBIA0067E

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0095G

The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition Possible cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
● Harness or connectors
0327 input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is ● Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0095H

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-272, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-270 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0327, P0328 KS

Wiring Diagram UBS0095I

EC

BBWA0630E

Revision: June 2004 EC-271 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0327, P0328 KS

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0095J

1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.

BBIA0067E

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F26, F301
● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-272 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0327, P0328 KS

4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR A

Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

5. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS C

Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
D
>> GO TO 6.

BBIA0232E

6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. H
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
I
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
K
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Harness connectors F26, F301 L
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ground
M

>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-273 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0327, P0328 KS

Component Inspection UBS0095K

KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.

SEF227W

Removal and Installation UBS0095L

KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-121, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-274 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731

A
Component Description UBS0095M

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of EC
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change. C
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
the engine revolution.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0095N

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
tachometer indication
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0095O

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause H
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
● Harness or connectors I
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
0335 sensor (POS) circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
while the engine is running.
● Signal plate J
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0095P

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
L
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON. M
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-275 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Wiring Diagram UBS0095Q

WBWA0100E

Revision: June 2004 EC-276 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 10V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Crankshaft position sensor PBIB1041E E

13 G
(POS)
Approximately 10V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1042E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0095R

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
J

>> GO TO 2.
K

BBIA0232E
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-277 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.

BBIA0238E

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 (with 5 A/T) or terminal 1 (except 5 A/T) and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 (with 5 A/T) or terminal 3 (except 5 A/T)
and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-278 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D

7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-280, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). F

8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

G
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. H
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END J

Revision: June 2004 EC-279 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Component Inspection UBS0095S

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

PBIB0563E

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)

PBIB0564E

Removal and Installation UBS0095T

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EM-30, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-280 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731

A
Component Description UBS0095U

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft EC
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification C
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause D
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIB0562E
change.
E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0095V

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0340 ● Harness or connectors
0340 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM G
(Bank 1) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft (Intake)
Camshaft position sensor
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-10, "START-
P0345 (PHASE) circuit
during engine running.
H
ING SYSTEM" .)
0345
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10,
(Bank 2)
pattern during engine running. "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
● Dead (Weak) battery I

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0095W

NOTE: J
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: K
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- M
onds at idle speed.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-285, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-285, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. SEF013Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-281 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Wiring Diagram UBS0095X

BANK 1

BBWA0633E

Revision: June 2004 EC-282 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Camshaft position sensor PBIB1039E E

33 W
(PHASE) (bank 1)
1.0 - 4.0V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1040E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H

Revision: June 2004 EC-283 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

BANK 2

BBWA0634E

Revision: June 2004 EC-284 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

1.0 - 4.0V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

Camshaft position sensor PBIB1039E E

14 W
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V

F
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
G
PBIB1040E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0095Y

1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM I

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?
J
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. K
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

2. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
M

>> GO TO 3.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-285 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.

BBIA0239E

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

SEF481Y

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-286 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 or 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D

8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-288, "Component Inspection" . E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F

9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

G
Check the following.
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft I
rear end or replace camshaft.

SEC905C

K
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
L
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-287 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Component Inspection UBS0095Z

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

PBIB0563E

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)

PBIB0564E

Removal and Installation UBS00960

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-80, "CAMSHAFT" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-288 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION PFP:14710

A
Description UBS00961

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position EGR volume
EGR volume control valve
control E
Battery Battery voltage*2

Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation

Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation F
Electrical load*1 Electrical load signal

Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed

G
TCM*1 Gear position, shifting signal
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti- I
mum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con-
ditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
● Engine stopped J
● Engine starting
● Engine idling
● Low engine coolant temperature K
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
● High engine speed
L
● Wide open throttle
● Low battery voltage
M

SEF551W

Revision: June 2004 EC-289 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR volume control valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.

SEF552W

EGR Temperature Sensor

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.

SEF599K

<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88
50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082
100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V

SEF068X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00962

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EGR TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

Revision: June 2004 EC-290 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

● Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step

● Air conditioner switch: OFF A
EGR VOL CON/V Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 10 - 55 step
quickly
● No load
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00963

If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sensor under the condition that calls for EGR, a
low-flow malfunction is diagnosed. C
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is D
open or shorted.)
● EGR volume control valve stuck closed
P0400 No EGR flow is detected under the condi-
EGR function (Close) ● Dead (Weak) battery E
0400 tion that calls for EGR.
● EGR passage clogged
● EGR temperature sensor and circuit
● Exhaust gas leaks F

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00965

CAUTION: G
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait H
at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
● P0400 will not be displayed at “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II even though DTC work
support test result is NG. I
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 10V at idle, then
stop engine immediately. J
● For best results, perform the test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or higher.
WITH CONSULT-II
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Confirm “COOLAN TEMP/S” value is within the range listed L
below.
COOLAN TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and M
allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do not attempt to
lower the engine coolant temperature with a fan or means other
than ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnos-
tic result.
3. Start engine and let it idle monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. SEF013Y
When the “COOLAN TEMP/S” value reaches 70°C (158°F),
immediately go to the next step.
4. Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
6. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) once and then stop vehicle with engine running.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 8.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step.

Revision: June 2004 EC-291 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions until
“TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approxi-
mately 30 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 4.5 - 8.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from SEF845Y

step 2.
8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check engine coolant temperature in MODE 1 with GST.
Engine coolant temperature: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize.
Do not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan or means other than ambient air. Doing so may
produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
3. Start engine and let it idle monitoring the engine coolant temperature value. When the engine coolant tem-
perature reaches 70°C (158°F), immediately go to the next step.
4. Maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.
Engine speed: 1,200 - 3,600 rpm
Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Selector lever: Suitable position
5. Stop vehicle.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
7. Repeat step 3 to 5.
8. Select MODE 3 with GST.
9. If DTC is detected, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using
CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. There-
fore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

Revision: June 2004 EC-292 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram UBS00966

EC

BBWA0665E

Revision: June 2004 EC-293 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
17 G/Y
18 Y/B [Engine is running]
EGR volume control valve 0.1 - 14V
19 W/B ● Idle speed
20 LG/R
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00967

1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

1. Start engine.
2. Check exhaust pipes and muffler for leaks.

PBIB1216E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace exhaust system.

Revision: June 2004 EC-294 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

BBIA0249E
E
4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. G
NG >> GO TO 3.

H
PBIB0627E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.

● Harness connectors E22, F35 J
● IPDM E/R harness connector E122
● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
K
>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal EGR volume control valve
17 6
18 3
19 4
20 1

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-295 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0400 EGR FUNCTION

5. CHECK EGR PASSAGE

Check EGR passage for clogging and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace EGR passage.

6. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-301, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve.

7. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND CIRCUIT

Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P 0405, P0406. Refer to EC-305, "DTC Confirmation Proce-
dure" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-296 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE PFP:14710

A
Description UBS00968

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position EGR volume
EGR volume control valve
control E
Battery Battery voltage*2

Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation

Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation F
Electrical load*1 Electrical load signal

Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed

G
TCM*1 Gear position, shifting signal
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti- I
mum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con-
ditions. The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions.
● Engine stopped J
● Engine starting
● Engine idling
● Low engine coolant temperature K
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
● High engine speed
L
● Wide open throttle
● Low battery voltage
M

SEF551W

Revision: June 2004 EC-297 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR volume control valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.

SEF552W

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00969

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
EGR VOL CON/V Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 10 - 55 step
quickly
● No load

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0096A

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0403 An improper voltage signal is sent to (The EGR volume control valve circuit is
EGR volume control valve circuit open or shorted.)
0403 ECM through the valve
● EGR volume control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0096C

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Rev engine from idle to 2,000 rpm 10 times.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-300, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-298 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS0096D

EC

BBWA0664E

Revision: June 2004 EC-299 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
17 G/Y
18 Y/B [Engine is running]
EGR volume control valve 0.1 - 14V
19 W/B ● Idle speed
20 LG/R
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0096E

1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0249E

4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0627E

Revision: June 2004 EC-300 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E22, F35
● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 EC
● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R

C
>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. E
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal EGR volume control valve
F
17 6
18 3
19 4 G
20 1

Continuity should exist. H

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE J

Refer to EC-301, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve.
L
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00AM5

EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-301 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

3. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2

and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6.
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
4. Remove EGR volume control valve.
5. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
valve harness connector.
6. Turn ignition switch ON.

SEF605Y

7. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with

CONSULT-II.

SEF015Y

8. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly for-
ward and backward according to the valve opening steps.
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.

SEF560W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-302 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0403 EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

3. Check resistance between EGR volume control valve terminal 2

and terminals 1, 3, terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6. A
Resistance: 20 - 24 Ω [at 20°C (68F°)]
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.
If OK, go to next step. EC
4. Remove EGR volume control valve.
5. Reconnect ECM harness connector and EGR volume control
C
valve harness connector.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF.
D

G
SEF605Y

7. Check that EGR volume control valve shaft moves smoothly for-
ward and backward according to the ignition switch position. H

SEF560W
K
Removal and Installation UBS0096F

EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EM-21, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" . L

Revision: June 2004 EC-303 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR PFP:14710

Component Description UBS0096G

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the

EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.

SEF599K

<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88
50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082
100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V

SEF068X

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AM6

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● Harness or connectors
An excessively low voltage from the EGR (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
P0405 EGR temperature sensor shorted.)
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
0405 circuit low input
when engine coolant temperature is low. ● EGR temperature sensor
● Malfunction of EGR function
● Harness or connectors
An excessively high voltage from the EGR (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is
P0406 EGR temperature sensor open.)
temperature sensor is sent to ECM even
0406 circuit high input
when engine coolant temperature is high. ● EGR temperature sensor
● Malfunction of EGR function

Revision: June 2004 EC-304 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0096J

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0405
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Verify that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates less than 50°C
(122°F). D
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range, cool
the engine down.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 8 seconds. E
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF174Y F
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0406
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at a temperature above –10°C (14°F).
With CONSULT-II I
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II. J
3. Hold engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
4. Touch “Qu” and set the EGR volume control valve opening to 50
step and check “EGR TEMP SEN” indication. K
“EGR TEMP SEN” indication should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is NG, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to the following step. L
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with SEF015Y
CONSULT-II. M
7. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,400 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 4 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB0164E

With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
3. Select MODE 1 with GST and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.

Revision: June 2004 EC-305 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

Engine speed 1,200 - 2,400 rpm

Vehicle speed 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Selector lever Suitable position
4. Select MODE 7 with GST.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-306 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0096K

EC

BBWA0663E

Revision: June 2004 EC-307 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0096L

1. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0250E

4. Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

PBIB1682E

2. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67, TCM termi-
nal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness for open or short between TCM and EGR temperature sensor
● Harness for open or short between ECM and EGR temperature sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.

4. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-309, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor.
Revision: June 2004 EC-308 2004 Maxima
 DTC P0405, P0406 EGRT SENSOR

5. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE A

Refer to EC-301, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00AM7

EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between EGR temperature sensor terminals 1 F
and 2 as shown in the figure.

SEF611Y
I

<Reference data>
J
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88 K
50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082
100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014
L
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
54 (EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
4. If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
M

SEF068X

Removal and Installation UBS0096M

EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EM-21, "EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-309 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0096N

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.

SEF484YB

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0420 ● Three way catalyst (manifold)
0420 ● Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not oper- ● Intake air leaks
Catalyst system effi- ate properly.
● Fuel injectors
P0430 ciency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity. ● Fuel injector leaks
0430
(Bank 2) ● Spark plug
● Improper ignition timing

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0096O

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF189Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.

Revision: June 2004 EC-310 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-

PORT” mode with CONSULT-II. A
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. EC
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.

SEF533Z

D
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes). E
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
F

G
SEF534Z

12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. H

13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-312, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" . I

SEF535Z K
Overall Function Check UBS0096P

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a DTC L
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Open engine hood.
6. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 74
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and engine
ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds.
If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to
EC-312, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0

PBIB1108E

Revision: June 2004 EC-311 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0096Q

1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .
Items Specifications
M/T 625 ± 50 rpm
Target idle speed 4-speed A/T 700 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
5-speed A/T 675 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC
Ignition timing
A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-312 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

5. CHECK INJECTORS A
1. Let engine idle.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-650 .
Battery voltage should exist.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-651, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D

PBIB1172E
E
6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
F
2. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
3. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
4. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. G
5. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
6. Check for spark.
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.
Refer to EC-629, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . I

SEF575Q

K
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
L
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM-39, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
M
3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

Revision: June 2004 EC-313 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950

System Description UBS0096R

NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

PBIB1026E

In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0096S

Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
● Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate prop- nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system erly, EVAP control system has a leak between ● Blocked rubber tube
0441 incorrect purge flow intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
● Cracked EVAP canister
sure sensor.
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
● Blocked purge port
● EVAP canister vent control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0096T

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If TC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

Revision: June 2004 EC-314 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
EC
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. C
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
D
Selector lever Suitable position
Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm E
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 9.0 msec
Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
F

I
PBIB0826E

If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.

7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC- J
316, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check UBS0096U
K
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST L
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. M
4. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
PBIB1109E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.

Revision: June 2004 EC-315 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

9. If NG, go to EC-316, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0096V

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.

2. CHECK PURGE FLOW

With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-688, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum
100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1678E

3. CHECK PURGE FLOW

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-688, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let engine idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-316 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it. C

5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT

D
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
E

G
SEF367U

3. Check that air flows freely. H

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. I
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.

SEF368U
K
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II L
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the M
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

PBIB1678E

7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

Revision: June 2004 EC-317 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-347 , P0453 EC-353 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.

13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 14.

14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-318 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0096W

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. C

PBIB1026E I

Revision: June 2004 EC-319 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
EVAP control system ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control
P0442 EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP system pressure sensor
small leak detected
0442 control system does not operate properly.
(negative pressure) ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0096X

NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-320 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

Follow the instruction displayed.

A

EC

PBIB0829E D
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-85, "Basic Inspection" . E
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE: F
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
G

H
SEC763C

WITH GST
I
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-65 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
J
2. Drive vehicle according to “Driving Pattern”, EC-65 .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Select MODE 1 with GST. K
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.

● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L

6. Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7. Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving Pattern”, EC-65 . M
8. Stop vehicle.
9. Select MODE 3 with GST.
● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-316 .

● If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step.

10. Select MODE 1 with GST.

● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.

● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-321 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0096Y

1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

SEF915U

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

Refer to EC-690, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

Revision: June 2004 EC-322 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE EC
DRAWING" .

D
BBIA0256E

SEF916U
H

NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
I

Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.

Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
J

Revision: June 2004 EC-323 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.

PEF917U

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.

SEF200U

Revision: June 2004 EC-324 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)

BBIA0240E
F
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G

Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
●

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak H
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.
J

SEF200U
K
8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-328, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace water separator. M

9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Check the following.
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-691, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

Revision: June 2004 EC-325 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

PBIB1381E

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 12.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: June 2004 EC-326 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
C
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 15.
E
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-28, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. G

16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. I

17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

J
Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. K
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. M
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 21.

Revision: June 2004 EC-327 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-694, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to DI-29, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00B2A

WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
● Do not disassemble water separator.

PBIB1032E

Revision: June 2004 EC-328 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE PFP:14920 A

Description UBS0096Z

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1
C
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
D
Battery Battery voltage*1
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge volume
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
purge flow control control solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position E
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank F
Vehicle speed signal*2 Vehicle speed
*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP H
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. I
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
J
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. K

SEF337U
M
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00970

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm —
● No load

Revision: June 2004 EC-329 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00971

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0444 to ECM through the valve
open ● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
● Harness or connectors
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit
0445 to ECM through the valve ● EVAP canister purge volume control
shorted
solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00972

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-333, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-330 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS00973

EC

BBWA0631E

Revision: June 2004 EC-331 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Idle speed

SEC990C
EVAP canister purge vol-
45 V/R
ume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).

SEC991C

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: June 2004 EC-332 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00974

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. C

E
BBIA0255E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control F

solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H

PBIB0192E
I

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

J
Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors F44, F101 K
● IPDM E/R harness connector E121
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM L

>> Repair harness or connectors.

M
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-333 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F44, F101
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1678E

6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00975

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No

PBIB0149E

Revision: June 2004 EC-334 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control A
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity
Condition EC
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
C
No supply No

PBIB0150E
D

Removal and Installation UBS00976

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-335 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935

Component Description UBS00977

The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
SEF381Z
Control System diagnosis.

BBIA0240E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00978

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00979

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.
● EVAP canister vent control valve

Revision: June 2004 EC-336 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0097A

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
D
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-339, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
E

SEF058Y
G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
H

Revision: June 2004 EC-337 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS0097B

BBWA0635E

Revision: June 2004 EC-338 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off) D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
E
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 R/Y [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
120 R/G
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
F

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0097C

1. INSPECTION START G

Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No H
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
I
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
K
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M

PBIB1679E

Revision: June 2004 EC-339 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.

BBIA0240E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0152E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M84, B101
● IPDM E/R harness connector E121
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-340 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M84
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. D
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. E
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE F

Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

I
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS0097D

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
K
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step. L
3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
M

PBIB1033E

5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

If OK, go to next step. PBIB1679E

Revision: June 2004 EC-341 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.

PBIB1033E

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E

If OK, go to next step.

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
5. Perform step 3 again.

Revision: June 2004 EC-342 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365

A
Component Description EBS00KJ2

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases. EC

E
BBIA0240E

PBIB1207E I

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00KJ3

Specification data are reference values. J

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
K
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00KJ4

NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to L
EC-477, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause M
EVAP control system ● Harness or connectors
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor-
0451 control system pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor
mance

Revision: June 2004 EC-343 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00KJ5

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-344, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF194Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00KJ6

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to EC-148, "Ground Inspection" .

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

BBIA0240E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-344 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

Refer to EC-345, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. EC
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-348 .
D

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00KJ7 E
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. F
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. G
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
H

-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

CAUTION: I
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.

● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). J
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-345 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:25085

Component Description UBS0097K

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.

BBIA0240E

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0097L

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0097M

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

EVAP control system ● Harness or connectors

P0452 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
pressure sensor low
0452 sent to ECM.
input ● EVAP control system pressure sensor

Revision: June 2004 EC-346 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0097N

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
D
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-349, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
F

G
SEF194Y

WITH GST H
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. I
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select MODE 7 with GST. J
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-349, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
K

PBIB1110E

Revision: June 2004 EC-347 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0097O

BBWA0636E

Revision: June 2004 EC-348 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres- C
32 BR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
EVAP control system pres-
48 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor power supply
D
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
F
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0097P

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2. H

J
BBIA0232E

2. CHECK CONNECTOR K
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
L

BBIA0240E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-349 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0138E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness connectors M82, F102
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-350 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

E
Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. I
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J

>> INSPECTION END

K
Component Inspection UBS0097Q

EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected. L
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. M
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa
Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.

● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-351 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:25085

Component Description UBS0097R

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.

BBIA0240E

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0097S

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0097T

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
EVAP control system ● EVAP canister vent control valve
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
pressure sensor high
0453 sent to ECM. ● EVAP canister
input
● Water separator
● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame

Revision: June 2004 EC-352 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0097U

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. C
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
D
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. E
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
F

G
SEF194Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. H
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select MODE 7 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-355, "Diagnostic Procedure" J
.

K
PBIB1110E

Revision: June 2004 EC-353 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS0097V

BBWA0636E

Revision: June 2004 EC-354 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres- C
32 BR [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
EVAP control system pres-
48 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sure sensor power supply
D
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
F
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0097W

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2. H

J
BBIA0232E

2. CHECK CONNECTOR K
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
L

BBIA0240E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-355 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0138E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-356 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND A
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. D
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

E
Check the following.
● Harness connectors B101, M81
● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
G
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. H
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. I
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE J

Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. K
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

Refer to EC-359, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

12. CHECK RUBBER TUBE

Check obstructed rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.

13. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-328, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace water separator.

Revision: June 2004 EC-357 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

14. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 15.
No >> GO TO 17.

PBIB1381E

15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-358 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Component Inspection UBS0097X

EVAP CONTROL PRESSURE SENSOR A

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. EC
3. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. C

Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg)
D
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

CAUTION: E
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.

● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB1173E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). F
5. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-359 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0097Y

This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

PBIB1026E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
EVAP control system has a very large leak such
P0455 EVAP control system ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system
0455 gross leak detected
does not operate properly. ● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP
control system pressure sensor
● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
● EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
● EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.

Revision: June 2004 EC-360 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. A

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0097Z

CAUTION: EC
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve C
properly.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
D
TESTING CONDITION:
● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface. E
● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. F
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
G
4. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) H
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed. I

L
PBIB0829E

NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to M
EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-362, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC
P0442, EC-322, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEC763C

Revision: June 2004 EC-361 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-65 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to Driving Pattern, EC-65 .
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Select MODE 1 with GST.
● If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.

● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

6. Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7. Drive vehicle again according to the Driving Pattern, EC-65 .
8. Stop vehicle.
9. Select MODE 3 with GST.
● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-362, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-322 .

● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-316 .

● If P0455, P0441, P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step.

10. Select MODE 1 with GST.

● If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.

● If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00980

1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

SEF915U

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-362 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A

Refer to EC-690, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE C

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. E

6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

F
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 7. G

7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Check the following. H
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-691, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve. I
Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

Revision: June 2004 EC-363 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.

BBIA0256E

SEF916U

Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.

Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.

9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-

sure in the system.

PEF917U

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.

SEF200U

Revision: June 2004 EC-364 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
EC
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)

BBIA0240E
F
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G

Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
●

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak H
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace.
J

SEF200U
K
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II L
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
M
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB1678E

Revision: June 2004 EC-365 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.

13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-28, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

Revision: June 2004 EC-366 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR A

Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE C

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-694, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
E
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and F
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. G
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE H

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. I
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-367 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00981

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.

PBIB1026E

Revision: June 2004 EC-368 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
● Incorrect fuel filler cap used
● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. EC
● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. C
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control
valve.
● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
D
● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
● Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system
E
● EVAP system has a very small pressure sensor
Evaporative emission
P0456 control system very leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube
0456 small leak (negative ● EVAP system does not operate ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
pressure check) properly. F
● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
and the circuit
● Fuel tank temperature sensor
● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing G
or damaged
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water H
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
● ORVR system leaks I
● Fuel level sensor and the circuit
● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve J

CAUTION:
● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on. K
● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
L
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00982

NOTE:
● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. M
● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
– Fuel filler cap is removed.
– Refilled or drained the fuel.
– EVAP component parts is/are removed.
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

Revision: June 2004 EC-369 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0837E

6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.

If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-85, "Basic Inspection" .
● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check UBS00983

WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
● Do not start engine.
● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.

BBIA0256E

Revision: June 2004 EC-370 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.

3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. A
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Connect GST and select MODE 8.
EC
6. Using MODE 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied. C
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP SEF462UI
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and D
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to next step.
E
8. Disconnect GST.
9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00984

1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
K

SEF915U

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION M

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION

Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-371 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

Refer to EC-690, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .

BBIA0256E

SEF916U

NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.

Models with CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.

Models without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

Revision: June 2004 EC-372 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
C
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres- D

sure in the system.

PEF917U

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak F
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
. G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace. H

SEF200U
I

Revision: June 2004 EC-373 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)

BBIA0240E

3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
●

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.

SEF200U

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-377, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace water separator.

9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Check the following.
● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-691, "Removal and Installation" .
● EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

Revision: June 2004 EC-374 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. C
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

PBIB1381E E

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

F
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG G
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 12. H

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

I
Check the following.
● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection J

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

K
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
L
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. M
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB1678E

Revision: June 2004 EC-375 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 15.

15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-28, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-688, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 21.

Revision: June 2004 EC-376 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-694, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
C
22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection. D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. E

23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

F
Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. G
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-29, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25. I
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
K
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS00B2B

WATER SEPARATOR L
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. M
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
● Do not disassemble water separator.

PBIB1032E

Revision: June 2004 EC-377 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060

Component Description UBS00985

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the unified meter and A/C amp. The unified meter and A/C amp.
sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN commu-
nication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

BBIA0081E

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00986

NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit ● Harness or connectors
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
0460 noise (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
to ECM.
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00987

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-379, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF195Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-378 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00988

1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. A

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1" .
C
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS00989 E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
F

Revision: June 2004 EC-379 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060

Component Description UBS0098A

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the unified meter and A/C amp. The unified meter and A/C amp.
sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN commu-
nication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

BBIA0081E

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098B

NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even ● Harness or connectors
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
tance.
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● Fuel level sensor

Overall Function Check UBS0098C

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-9,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 11, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-380 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.

8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT- A
II.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-
5/8 Imp gal) and stop it. EC
10. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
11. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and confirm whether C
the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 11.
If NG, go to EC-381, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y

D
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
E
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
F
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON. G
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). H
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to EC-381, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
I
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0098D

1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

J
Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. K
NG >> Go to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1" .

2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END M

Removal and Installation UBS0098E

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-381 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060

Component Description UBS0098F

The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the unified meter and A/C amp. The unified meter and A/C amp.
sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN commu-
nication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

BBIA0081E

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098G

NOTE:
If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage is sent from the ● Harness or connectors
0462 low input sensor is sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
● Harness or connectors
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage is sent from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0463 high input sensor is sent to ECM. ● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0098H

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-383, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF195Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-382 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0098I

1. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. A

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1" .
C
2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS0098J E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
F

Revision: June 2004 EC-383 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0500 VSS

DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702

Description UBS0098K

NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp.” from the “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” by CAN communication line. The unified meter and A/C amp. then sends the signal to the ECM
by CAN communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098L

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500 (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
0500 shorted)
even when vehicle is being driven.
● Wheel sensor
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0098M

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T models)
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 6,000 rpm (4-speed A/T models)
1,600 - 6,000 rpm (5-speed A/T models)
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
5.3 - 31.8 msec (M/T models)
B/FUEL SCHDL
5.5 - 31.8 msec (A/T models)
Selector lever Except P or N position (A/T models)
Except Neutral position (M/T models) SEF196Y

PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check UBS0098N

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Revision: June 2004 EC-384 2004 Maxima
 DTC P0500 VSS

WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels. A
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with EC
suitable gear position.
4. If NG, go to EC-385, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
C
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0098O

1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
D
Refer to BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. E
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

F
Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

>> INSPECTION END G

Revision: June 2004 EC-385 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781

Description UBS0098P

NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed
from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098Q

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause

P0506 Idle speed control system The idle speed is less than the target idle ● Electric throttle control actuator
0506 RPM lower than expected speed by 100 rpm or more. ● Intake air leak

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0098R

NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-49 ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service
Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-705 .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-387, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-386 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0098S

1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A

1. Start engine and let it idle.

2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. C

2. REPLACE ECM
D
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-100, "ECM E
Re-communicating Function" .
4. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . F
6. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END G

Revision: June 2004 EC-387 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781

Description UBS0098T

NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The ECM calculates the actual engine speed
from signals of crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098U

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Electric throttle control actuator
P0507 Idle speed control system The idle speed is more than the target idle
● Intake air leak
0507 RPM higher than expected speed by 200 rpm or more.
● PCV system

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0098V

NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform “Idle Air Volume Learning”, EC-49 ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the “Service
Data and Specifications (SDS)”, EC-705 .
TESTING CONDITION:
● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-389, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF174Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-388 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0098W

1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
C
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
D
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. E
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.

3. REPLACE ECM
F
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-100, "ECM G
Re-communicating Function" .
4. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . H
6. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

I
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-389 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763

Component Description UBS0098X

Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.

BBIA0241E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0098Y

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0098Z

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0550 Power steering pres- An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sure sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
● Power steering pressure sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00990

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-392, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-390 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00991

EC

BBWA0637E

Revision: June 2004 EC-391 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel is being turned.
12 W
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
Power steering pressure
68 L/Y [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
sensor power supply

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00992

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-392 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

D
BBIA0241E

3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with E

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

SEF479Y H

3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
J
4. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. K
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

Check the following.

● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between power steering pressure sensor and TCM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-393 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

6. CHECK PSP SENSOR

Refer to EC-394, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS00993

POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.

Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V

MBIB0126E

Revision: June 2004 EC-394 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0605 ECM

DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710

A
Component Description UBS00994

The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC

PBIB1164E

E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00995

This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605 G
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

FAIL-SAFE MODE H
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
I
● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
● ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00996

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION K
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II M
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-396, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-395 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0605 ECM

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-396, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
4. Repeat step 2 to 3 for 32 times
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-396, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS00997

1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-395 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-395 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-396 2004 Maxima

 DTC P0605 ECM

2. REPLACE ECM A
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-100, "ECM
Re-communicating Function" . EC
3. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . C

>> INSPECTION END

D

Revision: June 2004 EC-397 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER PFP:22693

Description UBS00998

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Air fuel ratio (A/F)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) sensor 1 heater Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air control

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00999

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A/F S1 HTR (B1)
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2)

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AM8

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1031 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio
1031 (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
range.
1 heater control circuit open or shorted.)
P1051 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
low
1051 through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) heater.)

P1032 The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio

1032 (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
range.
1 heater control circuit shorted.)
P1052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
high
1052 through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● A/F sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) heater.)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0099B

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
With CONSULT-II
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-403, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: June 2004 EC-398 2004 Maxima
 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.

4. Select MODE 3 with GST. A
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-403, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
● When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be performed twice as much as when using
CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. There- EC
fore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.

Revision: June 2004 EC-399 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

Wiring Diagram UBS00AM9

BANK 1

BBWA0613E

Revision: June 2004 EC-400 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 5V C

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
24 V
(Bank 1)
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

PBIB1584E E

Revision: June 2004 EC-401 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

BANK 2

BBWA0614E

Revision: June 2004 EC-402 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 5V C

[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
2 G/B
(Bank 2)
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

PBIB1584E E

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0099D

1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
G

BBIA0232E
J

3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

K

BBIA0235E

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1683E

Revision: June 2004 EC-403 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 (bank 1) or 2 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: June 2004 EC-404 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR HEATER

Component Inspection UBS0099E

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER A

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
EC
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and
1, 2, 5, 6.
Continuity should not exist. C
If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a D
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system E
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
F

PBIB1684E H
Removal and Installation UBS0099F

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . I

Revision: June 2004 EC-405 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710

Component Description UBS0099G

Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.

PBIB1164E

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0099H

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1065 ECM back-up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0099I

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
5. Repeat step 2 to 4 for 4 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-406 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

Wiring Diagram UBS0099J

EC

BBWA0638E

Revision: June 2004 EC-407 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 W/L [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0099K

1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

MBIB0026E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-408 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
C
See EC-406 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
With GST D
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”. E
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-406 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END G

5. REPLACE ECM
H
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-100, "ECM
Re-communicating Function" .
I
3. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J

>> INSPECTION END

K

Revision: June 2004 EC-409 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796

Component Description UBS0099L

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB0195E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS0099M

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INT/V SOL (B2) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
● No load

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0099N

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1111
1111 ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing control
through intake valve timing control solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
P1136 solenoid valve circuit
valve.
1136 ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0099O

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-414, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-410 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS0099P

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0666E

Revision: June 2004 EC-411 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing control PBIB1037E

11 R/L
solenoid valve (Bank 1)
7 - 12V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1038E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: June 2004 EC-412 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

BANK 2
A

EC

WBWA0070E

Revision: June 2004 EC-413 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed

Intake valve timing control PBIB1037E

10 V/W
solenoid valve (Bank 2)
7 - 12V

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1038E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS0099Q

1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.

BBIA0065E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0192E

Revision: June 2004 EC-414 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors F44, F101 EC
● IPDM E/R harness connector E122
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
C
● Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors. D

3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con- F
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
G
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. H
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F44, F101
J
● Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-416, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. M

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-415 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection UBS0099R

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)

PBIB0193E

Removal and Installation UBS0099S

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-416 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS0099T

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0099U

D
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion. E
P1121 Electric throttle control Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B) ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator not in specified range.
F
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
C) This self-diagnosis has the one trip detec-
tion logic.
G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the
MIL lights up. H
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
I
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
J
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0099V K

NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed,
perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. L
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B M
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/
T models), and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-418, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-417 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/
T models) and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to N, P position (A/T models) or Neutral posi-
tion (M/T models).
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-418, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS0099W

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

BBIA0242E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-418 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119

A
Description UBS0099X

NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC
P1126. Refer to EC-417 or EC-425 .
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- C
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS0099Y

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
E

● Harness or connectors
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
1122 performance problem ate properly. shorted) F
● Electric throttle control actuator

FAIL-SAFE MODE G
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
H
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS0099Z I

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
K
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-419 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram UBS009A0

WBWA0071E

Revision: June 2004 EC-420 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE C
3 R [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V
D
[Ignition switch: ON]
Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 O/L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
E
● Accelerator pedal is releasing

PBIB1104E

F
0 - 14V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped G
5 W/L
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
H
PBIB1105E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
I
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
J
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009A1

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
L
>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-421 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1171E

Revision: June 2004 EC-422 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
C
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. D
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
F
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse. H
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. I
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG K
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-14, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist BBIA0233E
6
4 Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: June 2004 EC-423 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

BBIA0242E

12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Refer to EC-424, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009A2

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

Remove and Installation UBS009A3

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-424 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS009A4

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009A5

Specification data are reference values.

D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009A6

E

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
● Harness or connectors
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1124 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted) G
● Throttle control motor relay
● Harness or connectors
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is H
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
● Throttle control motor relay

I
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode J
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
K
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009A7

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION: M
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-425 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-426 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

Wiring Diagram UBS009A8

EC

WBWA0072E

Revision: June 2004 EC-427 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 R [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF]
104 O Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009A9

1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1171E

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-428 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

4. CHECK FUSE A
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
C
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
D
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V E
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)

OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6. MBIB0028E
G
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42. I
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. J
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
M
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-14, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-429 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119

Component Description UBS009AA

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009AB

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009AC

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-432, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-430 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009AD

EC

WBWA0073E

Revision: June 2004 EC-431 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 14V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
4 O/L
(Close) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing

PBIB1104E

0 - 14V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor ● Engine stopped
5 W/L
(Open) ● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing

PBIB1105E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009AE

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-432 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
5 Should not exist D
3
4 Should exist
5 Should exist BBIA0233E
6
4 Should not exist E

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR G

Refer to EC-433, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
I
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. L
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS009AF

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

PBIB0095E

Revision: June 2004 EC-433 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Removal and Installation UBS009AG

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-434 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS009AH

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009AI

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Warm-up condition
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for rpm quickly. G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009AJ

H
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the A/F sensor 1. The oxygen storage
capacity of the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. I
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut. J

SEF558Z

L
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1146 ● Harness or connectors
1146 M
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
2 minimum voltage
P1166 reached to the specified voltage.
monitoring ● Fuel pressure
1166
(Bank 2) ● Injectors

Revision: June 2004 EC-435 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009AK

NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

PBIB0818E

10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check UBS009AL

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-436 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times. A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this
procedure.
EC
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D C
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T
models). PBIB1607E
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this D
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
E

Revision: June 2004 EC-437 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

Wiring Diagram UBS009AM

BANK 1

BBWA0617E

Revision: June 2004 EC-438 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L
(Bank 1)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Revision: June 2004 EC-439 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

BANK 2

BBWA0618E

Revision: June 2004 EC-440 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 L
(Bank 2)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009AN

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H

>> GO TO 2.
I

BBIA0232E K

Revision: June 2004 EC-441 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-240 .
No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-442 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC

J
BBIA0257E

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 3.

Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

Revision: June 2004 EC-443 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 74 2 1
P1166 55 2 2

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 74 2 1
P1166 55 2 2

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-444, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009AO

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

SEF174Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-444 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A

EC

PBIB1672E

D
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
E

PBIB1210E H
TYPE III VEHICLES

PBIB2298E

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehicles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at L
least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: M
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-445 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehi-
cles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least once during this pro-
cedure.
If the voltage is above 0.70V (type I and type III vehicles),
0.78V (type III vehicles) at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T PBIB1607E
models).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation UBS009AP

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-446 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 PFP:226A0

A
Component Description UBS009AQ

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. EC
Even if switching characteristics of the A/F sensor 1 are shifted, the
air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the
heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt- C
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for D
engine control operation.
SEF327R

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009AR

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
HO2S2 (B1) ● Warm-up condition
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) ● After keeping engine speed Revving engine from idle up to 3,000
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for rpm quickly. G
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) under no load.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009AS

H
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen
sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time.
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the I
sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

PBIB2297E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1147 ● Harness or connectors
1147 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor ● Heated oxygen sensor 2
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
2 maximum voltage
P1167 reached to the specified voltage. ● Fuel pressure
monitoring
1167 ● Injectors
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

Revision: June 2004 EC-447 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009AT

NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F). SEF174Y
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

PBIB0819E

10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-453, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check UBS009AU

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-448 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times. A
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehi-
cles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least once during this pro-
EC
cedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. C
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T PBIB1607E
models). D
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehicles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least
once during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-453, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E

Revision: June 2004 EC-449 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

Wiring Diagram UBS009AV

BANK 1

BBWA0617E

Revision: June 2004 EC-450 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
74 L
(Bank 1)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Revision: June 2004 EC-451 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

BANK 2

BBWA0618E

Revision: June 2004 EC-452 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
● Warm-up condition
● Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen sensor 2 quickly after the following conditions are
55 L
(Bank 2)
0 - Approximately 1.0V D
met.
– After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load. E
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 2
78 B/W ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed F

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009AW

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. H

>> GO TO 2.
I

BBIA0232E K

Revision: June 2004 EC-453 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-231 .
No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-454 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC

J
BBIA0257E

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 3.

Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M

Revision: June 2004 EC-455 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 74 2 1
P1167 55 2 2

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 74 2 1
P1167 55 2 2

Continuity should not exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-456, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009AX

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

SEF174Y

Revision: June 2004 EC-456 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. A

EC

PBIB1672E

D
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
E

PBIB1210E H
TYPE III VEHICLES

PBIB2298E

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehicles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at L
least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION: M
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
engine ground.

Revision: June 2004 EC-457 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.70V (type I and type II vehi-
cles), 0.78V (type III vehicles) at least once during this pro-
cedure.
If the voltage is above 0.70V (type I and type III vehicles),
0.78V (type III vehicles) at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position with “OD” OFF (A/T models), 5th gear position (M/T PBIB1607E
models).
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation UBS009AY

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-458 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009AZ

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

EC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1
● Harness or connectors
1148 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
[The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is C
(Bank 1) Closed loop control in the specified condition.
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1168 does not operate even when vehicle is driving
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) in the specified condition. D
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.
E

Revision: June 2004 EC-459 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850

Description UBS009B3

The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009B4

Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● ABS actuator and electric unit (control
P1211 ECM receives a malfunction information from unit)
TCS control unit
1211 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
● TCS related parts

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009B5

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009B6

Go to BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-460 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850

A
Description UBS009B7

NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for ABS actuator and electric unit C
(control unit) but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009B8
D
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
E

● Harness or connectors
ECM can not receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or
P1212 TCS communication shorted.) F
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
1212 line
continuously. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
● Dead (Weak) battery
G
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009B9

TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. I
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
4. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-461, "Diagnostic Proce-
J
dure" .

L
SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009BA

1. CHECK ABS ACTUATTOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION

Refer to BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-461 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000

System Description UBS009BB

NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
COOLING FAN CONTROL
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1

Battery Battery voltage*1

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R
control (Cooling fan relays)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: These signals are sent to ECM through CAN communication line.

The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
OPERATION

PBIB1587E

Revision: June 2004 EC-462 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009BC

A
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF EC
● Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C C
OFF
(201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C LOW D
● Engine: After warming up, idle (210°F)
COOLING FAN the engine
Engine coolant temperature is
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
between 100°C (212°F) and 104°C MID
(219°F)
E

Engine coolant temperature is 105°C

HI
(221°F) or more
F
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009BD

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. G
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) I
● IPDM E/R
● Cooling fan does not operate properly ● Cooling fan
(Overheat). J
● Radiator hose
P1217 Engine over temperature ● Cooling fan system does not operate
● Radiator
1217 (Overheat) properly (Overheat).
● Radiator cap
● Engine coolant was not added to the
● Water pump K
system using the proper filling method.
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-472, "Main
12 Causes of Overheating" . L

CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-14, "Changing Engine
M
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-16, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-11, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE
RATIO" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.

Revision: June 2004 EC-463 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Overall Function Check UBS009BE

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

SEF621W

4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF646X

WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-467,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors
operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active Test" .
4. If NG, go to EC-467, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF621W

Revision: June 2004 EC-464 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Wiring Diagram UBS009BF

EC

BBWA0642E

Revision: June 2004 EC-465 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

BBWA0643E

Revision: June 2004 EC-466 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009BG

1. INSPECTION START A

Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
2. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II D
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II. E
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed
(LOW/MID/HI).
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-469, "PRO-
CEDURE A" .) G

SEF784Z

H
3. CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II I
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PG-20, "Auto Active
Test" .
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-469, "PROCEDURE A" .) K

4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the L
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
M
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "CHECK-
ING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . SLC754A

● Hose

● Radiator

● Water pump

Revision: June 2004 EC-467 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
pressure: , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.

SLC755A

6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8.6 mm/95°C
(0.339 in/203°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature.
For details, refer to CO-24, "THERMOSTAT AND THERMO-
STAT HOUSING" .
OK or NG
SLC343
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace thermostat

7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-187, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-472, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-468 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

PROCEDURE A
A
1. CHECK IPDM E/R POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E123. EC
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 15 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
C
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1681E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

Check the following.

● 40A fusible link G
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors. H

3. CHECK IPDM E/R GROUND CIRCUIT

I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-469 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT-I

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.

BBIA0066E

2. Check voltage between cooling fan motor-1 terminals 1, 2 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1670E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● 40A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and battery

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 8
Cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminals 11, 12
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-470 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT-I A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
EC

BBIA0066E
E
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-2 terminals 3, 4 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
8. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 CIRCUIT-II
1. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 13 I
Cooling fan motor-2 terminal and IPDM E/R terminals 10, 14
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
J
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
L
9. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-472, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-14, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-471 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE

Main 12 Causes of Overheating UBS009BH

Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-11
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level CO-10
in reservoir tank and radi-
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-12
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)

ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-10

ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-24
lower radiator hoses

ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-462 ).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer

ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving CO-10
reservoir tank and idling

OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in CO-10

reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-99
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-121
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection UBS009BI

COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.

Terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor
High 1, 2 3, 4

Cooling fan motor should operate.

SEF734W
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-472 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS009BJ

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009BK

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is excessively ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1225 low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009BL

H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: I
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
K
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-474, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. L

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-473 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009BM

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

BBIA0242E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS009BN

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-474 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS009BO

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009BP

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance G
1226 successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009BQ

H
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: I
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
K
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Repeat step 3 to 4 for 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-476, "Diagnostic Procedure" L
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-475 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009BR

1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.

BBIA0242E

2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

Removal and Installation UBS009BS

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-476 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119

A
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009BT

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

EC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.)
P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source C
● Electric throttle control actuator
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
● ECM pin terminal
D
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
E
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring. F
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009BU

NOTE: G
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. H

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
I
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-479, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J

L
SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M

Revision: June 2004 EC-477 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

Wiring Diagram UBS009BV

WBWA0074E

Revision: June 2004 EC-478 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle position sensor C
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009BW

D
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. E

>> GO TO 2.
F

BBIA0232E
H

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
J

L
BBIA0233E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0082E

Revision: June 2004 EC-479 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS

Check the following.
● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 1.
● ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-200, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-480 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS00AMA

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra- EC
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G

H
SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AMB

I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
J
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AMC

K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
P1271
1271 ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or M
P1281 circuit no activity detected A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. shorted.)
1281 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AMD

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-481 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.

If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-486, "Diag-
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z

ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec
Gear position Suitable position

NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.

● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-486, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-482 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AME

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-483 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V

Revision: June 2004 EC-484 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2
A

EC

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-485 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AMF

1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

BBIA0232E

3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1683E

Revision: June 2004 EC-486 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 EC
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
C

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1 G
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
H
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

I
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2 J
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
K
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2 L

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009C4

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-487 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

Component Description UBS00AMG

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra-
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AMH

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AMI

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P1272
1272 ● Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P1282 circuit no activity detected sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. shorted.)
1282 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AMJ

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-488 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.

If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-493, "Diag- A
nostic Procedure" .
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then EC
restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
C
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive sec-
onds.
SEF581Z

ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec
E
Gear position Suitable position

NOTE:
● Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. F
● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
7. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-493, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H

Revision: June 2004 EC-489 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AMK

BANK 1

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-490 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-491 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-492 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AML

1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F

BBIA0232E I

3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

J

BBIA0235E M
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1683E

Revision: June 2004 EC-493 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009CC

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-494 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS00AMM

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra- EC
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G

H
SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AMN

I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
J
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AMO

K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
P1273 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1273
● The output voltage computed by ECM from the ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 M
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side ● Fuel pressure
P1283 lean shift monitoring
for a specified period. ● Injectors
1283
(Bank 2) ● Intake air leaks

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AMP

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-495 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 13 min-
utes.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF968Y

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Select MODE 3 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected.
7. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. BBIA0035E

10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 13 min-
utes.
11. Select MODE 7 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-496 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AMQ

BANK 1 A

EC

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-497 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V

Revision: June 2004 EC-498 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2
A

EC

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-499 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AMR

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.

BBIA0234E

Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-500 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. C
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

SEF968Y

F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
H
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
I
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-231 .
No >> GO TO 4.
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-501 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1683E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-502 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR

6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
C
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5 D
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. F
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal G
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
H
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
I
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. M
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009CK

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-503 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

Component Description UBS00AMS

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra-
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-

pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).

SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00AMT

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AMU

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 signal is mon-
itored not to be shifted to the LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
P1274 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1274 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side
P1284 rich shift monitoring
for a specified period. ● Injectors
1244
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AMV

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.

Revision: June 2004 EC-504 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. A
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
7. Let engine idle for 1 minute. EC
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes.
9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" C
.
SEF968Y

D
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. E
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con- F
nector.
6. Select MODE 3 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is
detected. G
7. Select MODE 4 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. H
9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. BBIA0035E

10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 min-
utes. I
11. Select MODE 7 with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
J

Revision: June 2004 EC-505 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AMW

BANK 1

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-506 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-507 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-508 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AMX

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F

>> GO TO 2.
G

BBIA0232E I

2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. J

M
BBIA0234E

Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-509 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-240 .
No >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-510 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

BBIA0235E
E
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
G
5. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. J

K
PBIB1683E

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART L

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 M
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-511 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR

7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009CS

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-512 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS009CT

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra- EC
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G

H
SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009CU

I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
J
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009CV

K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause L
P1276 ● Harness or connectors
1276 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ shorted.) M
P1286 circuit high voltage F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1286
(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009CW

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
Revision: June 2004 EC-513 2004 Maxima
 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-519, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen.
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,000 rpm
Vehicle speed 70 - 120 km/h (43 - 75 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
Selector lever ● D position with “OD” ON (A/T)
● 5th position (M/T)

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from

step 2. SEF576Z

7. Release accelerator pedal fully.

NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.

SEF577Z

8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.

If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from
step 6.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-519, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF578Z

Overall Function Check UBS009CX

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the front heated oxygen sensor circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set D position with “OD” ON (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 3 five times.

Revision: June 2004 EC-514 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.

9. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. A
If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-519, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC

Revision: June 2004 EC-515 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AMY

BANK 1

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-516 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-517 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-518 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AMZ

1. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F

BBIA0232E I

3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

J

BBIA0235E M
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1683E

Revision: June 2004 EC-519 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should exist.

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2

Continuity should not exist.

5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009D0

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-520 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS009D1

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra- EC
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G

H
SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009D2

I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
J
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009D3

K
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine oper-
ating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 temperature L
index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately
long or not.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause M
P1278 ● Harness or connectors
1278 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) shorted.)
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
P1288 circuit slow response
signal takes more than the specified time. ● Injectors
1288
● Intake air leaks
(Bank 2)
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV
● Mass air flow sensor

Revision: June 2004 EC-521 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AN0

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1minute.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
TYPE III VEHICLES
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of "A/F SEN1" in "DTC WORK
SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch "START".
If "COMPLETED" appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If "COMPLETED" does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.

PBIB0756E

7. After performing the following procedure, "TESTING" will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for
about 10 seconds.
If "TESTING" is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
"TESTING" is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E

Revision: June 2004 EC-522 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

9. Make sure that "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED".

If "TESTING" changed to "OUT OF CONDITION", refer to A
EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG
RESULT". EC
If "NG" is displayed, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB0758E

D
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select "MODE 1" with GST. E
3. Calculate the total value of "Short term fuel trim" and "Long term fuel trim" indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
F
If NG, check the following.
● Intake air leaks

● Exhaust gas leaks

G
● Incorrect fuel pressure

● Lack of fuel

● Fuel injector H
● Incorrect PCV hose connection

● PCV valve

● Mass air flow sensor I

4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
J
6. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. K
9. Select "MODE 7" with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-523 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AN1

BANK 1

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-524 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-525 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-526 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009D7

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F

>> GO TO 2.
G

BBIA0232E I

2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. J

M
BBIA0234E

Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-527 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: June 2004 EC-528 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

SEF968Y

F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
H
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
I
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-231 , EC-240 .
No >> GO TO 6.
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-529 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

PBIB1683E

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-530 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
C
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5 D
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. F
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal G
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
H
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
I
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. M
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

11. CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-700, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

Revision: June 2004 EC-531 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR

12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009D8

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-532 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR PFP:22693

A
Component Description UBS009D9

The A/F sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor
element of the A/F sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentra- EC
tion cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports
ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
C
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 <
< air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the D
electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where
they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z

E
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen-
pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion
gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor is able to F
indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater
is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating tempera-
ture of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F).
G

H
SEF580Z

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009DA

I
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
J
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
● Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 1.5V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009DB

K
To judge the malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F sig-
nal computed by ECM from the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine oper-
ating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the air fuel ration (A/F) sensor 1 temperature L
index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately
long or not.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause M
P1279 ● Harness or connectors
1279 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
(Bank 1) shorted.)
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Fuel pressure
signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1
P1289 circuit slow response
signal takes more than the specified time. ● Injectors
1289
● Intake air leaks
(Bank 2)
● Exhaust gas leaks
● PCV
● Mass air flow sensor

Revision: June 2004 EC-533 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00AN2

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
TYPE I AND TYPE II VEHICLES
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1minute.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
TYPE III VEHICLES
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of "A/F SEN1" in "DTC WORK
SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch "START".
If "COMPLETED" appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step
10.
If "COMPLETED" does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to
the following step.

PBIB0756E

7. After performing the following procedure, "TESTING" will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it
for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for
about 10 seconds.
If "TESTING" is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-
135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that
"TESTING" is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
PBIB1925E

Revision: June 2004 EC-534 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

9. Make sure that "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED".

If "TESTING" changed to "OUT OF CONDITION", refer to A
EC-135, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG
RESULT". EC
If "NG" is displayed, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB0758E

D
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select "MODE 1" with GST. E
3. Calculate the total value of "Short term fuel trim" and "Long term fuel trim" indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
F
If NG, check the following.
● Intake air leaks

● Exhaust gas leaks

G
● Incorrect fuel pressure

● Lack of fuel

● Fuel injector H
● Incorrect PCV hose connection

● PCV valve

● Mass air flow sensor I

4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
J
6. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. K
9. Select "MODE 7" with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-535 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS00AN3

BANK 1

BBWA0611E

Revision: June 2004 EC-536 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
57 P Approximately 2.6V C
[Engine is running]
58 SB Approximately 2.3V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 1) ● Warm-up condition
76 G/Y Approximately 3.1V
● Idle speed
77 LG Approximately 2.3V
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-537 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

BANK 2

BBWA0612E

Revision: June 2004 EC-538 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TERMI- EC
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
16 LG/B Approximately 3.1V C
[Engine is running]
35 O/L Approximately 2.6V
A/F sensor 1 (Bank 2) ● Warm-up condition
56 BR/Y Approximately 2.3V
● Idle speed
75 Y/R Approximately 2.3V
D

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009DF

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. F

>> GO TO 2.
G

BBIA0232E I

2. RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. J

M
BBIA0234E

Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N-m (4.1 - 6.1 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-539 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.

Revision: June 2004 EC-540 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”
or “START”.
C
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
D

SEF968Y

F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 3 seconds.
H
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
I
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-68, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. J
9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0035E

Is it difficult to start engine?

K
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P017, P01752. Refer to EC-231 , EC-231 .
No >> GO TO 6.
L

Revision: June 2004 EC-541 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

6. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.

BBIA0235E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

PBIB1683E

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-542 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. EC
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
C
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5 D
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
E
Continuity should exist.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. F
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Bank 1 Bank 2
ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal G
76 1 16 1
57 5 35 5
H
58 6 56 6
77 2 75 2
I
Continuity should not exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
K
9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-405, "Component Inspection" . L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace A/F sensor 1. M
10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-171, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

11. CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-700, "POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.

Revision: June 2004 EC-543 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR

12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace A/F sensor 1.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009DG

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-26, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-544 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION PFP:14710

A
Description UBS009DH

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position EGR volume
EGR volume control valve
control E
Battery Battery voltage*2

Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner operation

Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation F
Electrical load*1 Electrical load signal

Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed

G
TCM*1 Gear position, shifting signal
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. H
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti- I
mum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con-
ditions. The EGR volume control valve remains closed under the following conditions.
● Engine stopped J
● Engine starting
● Engine idling
● Low engine coolant temperature K
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
● High engine speed
L
● Wide open throttle
● Low battery voltage
M

SEF551W

Revision: June 2004 EC-545 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EGR Volume Control Valve
The EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow
rate of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding
phases. It operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM.
Two windings are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an
ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or closes, changing the flow
rate. When no change in the flow rate is needed, the ECM does not
issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the
valve remains at that particular opening.

SEF552W

EGR Temperature Sensor

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passageway. When the EGR volume control valve opens, hot
exhaust gases flow, and the temperature in the passageway
changes. The EGR temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies
a voltage signal sent from the ECM. This modified signal then
returns to the ECM as an input signal. As the temperature increases,
EGR temperature sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis.

SEF599K

<Reference data>
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V MΩ
0 (32) 4.59 0.73 - 0.88
50 (122) 2.32 0.074 - 0.082
100 (212) 0.62 0.011 - 0.014
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 54
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing
so may damage the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
When EGR system is operating.
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V

SEF068X

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009DI

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EGR TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V

Revision: June 2004 EC-546 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

A
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0 step
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
EGR VOL CON/V Revving engine up to 3,000 rpm
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 10 - 55 step
quickly EC
● No load

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00AN4

If the EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition that does not call for EGR, a high-flow C
malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
D
● Harness or connectors
(The EGR volume control valve circuit is
P1402 EGR flow is detected under the condition open or shorted.)
EGR function (Open) E
1402 that does not call for EGR. ● EGR volume control valve leaking or
stuck open
● EGR temperature sensor
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009DL

NOTE:
● Diagnosis for this DTC will occur when engine coolant temperature is below 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). G
Therefore, it will be better to turn ignition switch ON (start engine) at the engine coolant temperature below
30°C (86°F) when starting DTC confirmation procedure.
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait H
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). I
● Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must be
verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II before
starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of range
J
below, the test cannot be conducted.
COOLAN TEMP/S : −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)*
EGR TEMP SEN : Less than 4.8V K
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park the
vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine temperature to
stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the engine coolant tem- L
perature or EGR temperature with a fan or means other than SEF202Y
ambient air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnos-
tic result.
*: Although CONSULT-II screen displays “–10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)” as a range of engine coolant temper- M
ature, ignore it.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
2. Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.

Revision: June 2004 EC-547 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

4. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
80 seconds or more.)

PBIB1600E

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn ignition OFF and cool the engine coolant tem-
perature to the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F). Retry from step 1.
5. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
550, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select MODE 1 with GST.
2. Check that engine coolant temperature is within the range of −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F).
3. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 54 (EGR temperature
sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.8V.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Stop engine.
6. Perform steps 1 to 4 again.
7. Select MODE 3 with GST.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-550, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
– When using GST, DTC Confirmation Procedure should be
performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con- PBIB1671E

cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is rec-

ommended.

Revision: June 2004 EC-548 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram UBS009DM

EC

BBWA0665E

Revision: June 2004 EC-549 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
17 G/Y
18 Y/B [Engine is running]
EGR volume control valve 0.1 - 14V
19 W/B ● Idle speed
20 LG/R
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009DN

1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0249E

4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0627E

Revision: June 2004 EC-550 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1402 EGR FUNCTION

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E22, F35
● IPDM E/R harness connector E122 EC
● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EGR volume control valve and ECM
C

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
ECM terminal EGR volume control valve
17 6
18 3 G
19 4
20 1
H
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-301, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve. L

5. CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-309, "Component Inspection" . M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EGR temperature sensor.

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-551 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

PFP:14920

Description UBS009DO

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
2 Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed signal*
*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

SEF337U

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009DP

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm —
● No load

Revision: June 2004 EC-552 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009DQ

A
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
● EVAP canister purge volume control EC
solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
The canister purge flow is detected during the
EVAP canister purge ● EVAP canister vent control valve
P1444 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP C
volume control solenoid
1444 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is ● EVAP canister
valve
completely closed.
● Water separator
● Hoses D
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009DR E

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II G
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
H
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
I
5. Touch “START”.

PBIB0839E

6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take M
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
556, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
4. Select MODE 7 with GST.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-556, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-553 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS009DS

BBWA0631E

Revision: June 2004 EC-554 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] D
● Idle speed

E
SEC990C
EVAP canister purge vol-
45 V/R
ume control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) F

[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
G
than 100 seconds after starting engine).

SEC991C H
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition I
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V) J
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V) K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Revision: June 2004 EC-555 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009DT

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0255E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0192E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors F44, F101
● IPDM E/R harness connector E122
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-556 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F44, F101
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. D

G
BBIA0240E

2. Check connectors for water.

H
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. I
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR J

Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. K
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
L
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

PBIB1678E

Revision: June 2004 EC-557 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-559, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.

10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-341, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

11. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 12.
No >> GO TO 14.

PBIB1381E

12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

Revision: June 2004 EC-558 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

14. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR A

Refer to EC-328, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. EC
NG >> Replace water separator.

15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection UBS009DU

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve using “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode F
with CONSULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B G
100% Yes
0% No H

PBIB0149E
I
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions. J
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between K
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
L

PBIB0150E

Removal and Installation UBS009DV

M
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-559 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935

Component Description UBS009DW

The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
SEF381Z
Control System diagnosis.

BBIA0240E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009DX

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009DY

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● EVAP canister vent control valve
● EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
P1446 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains
● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
1446 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions.
vent control valve
● Water separator
● EVAP canister is saturated with water

Revision: June 2004 EC-560 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009DZ

A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. C
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. D
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. E
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds. F
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-563, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
G
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. H

K
PBIB0972E

8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-563, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

L
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-561 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS009E0

BBWA0635E

Revision: June 2004 EC-562 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off) D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
E
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
117 R/Y [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
120 R/G
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
F

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009E1

1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. H

K
BBIA0240E

3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
M
2. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-328, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace water separator.

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Refer to EC-565, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

Revision: June 2004 EC-563 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

4. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1381E

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● EVAP canister for damage
● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-351, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-564 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

Component Inspection UBS009E2

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE A

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being EC
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step. C
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
D

E
PBIB1033E

5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

F
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B G
ON No
OFF Yes
H
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

If OK, go to next step. PBIB1679E
I
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II J
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. K

PBIB1033E

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E

If OK, go to next step.

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

Revision: June 2004 EC-565 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

5. Perform step 3 again.

Revision: June 2004 EC-566 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551

A
Component Description UBS009EA

ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for

each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines EC
which button is operated.
Refer to EC-702, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
C

BBIA0243E

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009EB

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
CRUISE switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: Released OFF
G
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON H
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON I
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009EC

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. J

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to K
EC-395, "DTC P0605 ECM".
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
L
● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
● Harness or connectors
steering switch is sent to ECM.
(The switch circuit is open or
P1564 ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 steering switch is out of the specified range. M
● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
● ECM
stuck ON.

Revision: June 2004 EC-567 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009ED

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-568 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Wiring Diagram UBS009EE

EC

BBWA0646E

Revision: June 2004 EC-569 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 4V
● ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
● CRUISE switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 2V
● COAST/SET switch: ON
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 3V
● ACCEL/RESUME switch: ON

Revision: June 2004 EC-570 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009EF

1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. C

Switch Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON D
CRUISE MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
COAST/SET SET SW E
Released OFF
Pressed ON
ACCEL/RES RESUME/ACC SW
Released OFF F
SEC006D
Pressed ON
CANCEL CANCEL SW
Released OFF
G
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
H
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V] I
Pressed Approx. 0
CRUISE SW
Released Approx. 4
J
Pressed Approx. 2
COAST/SET SW
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 3 K
ACCEL/RES SW PBIB0311E
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL SW L
Released Approx. 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> GO TO 2.

Revision: June 2004 EC-571 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
5. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
15 and ECM terminal 67, TCM terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
6. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG BBIA0243E

OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, F59
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
● Harness for open and short between TCM and combination switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Combination switch (spiral cable)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-573, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. Refer to AV-61, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel
Audio Control Switches" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-572 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END EC

Component Inspection UBS009EG

ASCD STEERING SWITCH C

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. D
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 0
CRUISE SW E
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 660
COAST/SET SW
Released Approx. 4,000 F
Pressed Approx. 1,480
ACCEL/RES SW PBIB1673E
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 250 G
CANCEL SW
Released Approx. 4,000

Revision: June 2004 EC-573 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

Component Description UBS009ER

When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-702, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

BBIA0087E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009ES

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
ON
BRAKE SW1 Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T)
● Ignition switch: ON
(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
OFF
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T)

BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

● Ignition switch: ON
(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009ET

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-395, "DTC P0605 ECM".
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Harness or connectors
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 (The ASCD clutch switch circuit is open or
P1572 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch shorted.)
ASCD brake switch
1572 and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the
● Stop lamp switch
ECM at the same time.
● ASCD brake switch
● ASCD clutch switch
● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
● ECM

Revision: June 2004 EC-574 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

DTC confirmation Procedure UBS009EU

A
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a C
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF). D
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
E
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
F
If DTC is detected, go to EC-578, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
G
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
H
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location 5 seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-578, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. J

Revision: June 2004 EC-575 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram UBS009EV

BBWA0647E

Revision: June 2004 EC-576 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V) D
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully (11 - 14V) E
released (M/T)
108 G/R ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T) F
Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is slightly
depressed (M/T)
G

Revision: June 2004 EC-577 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009EW

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON

M/T models
CONDITION INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF SEC011D

When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage

M/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8.

Revision: June 2004 EC-578 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A

With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C

SEC013D E

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. H
NG >> GO TO 13.

I
PBIB1677E

3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. K

BBIA0087E

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal is fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0857E

Revision: June 2004 EC-579 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0088E

4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB0799E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

Refer to EC-583, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.

Revision: June 2004 EC-580 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

BBIA0087E
E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. G
NG >> GO TO 9.

H
PBIB0857E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.

● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-581 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to EC-583, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

BBIA0049E

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

PBIB0117E

14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

Revision: June 2004 EC-582 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-583, "Component Inspection" D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. E

18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F

>> INSPECTION END

G
Component Inspection UBS009EX

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions. I
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
J
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. K

SEC023D

L
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
M
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity
When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,

"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

SEC024D

STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

Revision: June 2004 EC-583 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1

and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

PBIB0118E

Revision: June 2004 EC-584 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036

A
Component Description UBS009F2

The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified
meter and A/C amp.” and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals EC
for ASCD control. Refer to EC-702, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009F3

C
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC D
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-384, "DTC P0500 VSS" E
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-395, "DTC P0605 ECM"
F
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.) G
● Unified meter and A/C amp.
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
H
● Wheel sensor
● TCM
● ECM
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009F4

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (TCS switch or VDC switch OFF).
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-586, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-585 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009F5

1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-40, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" or AT-425, "OBD-II Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.

2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Refer to BRC-53, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-96, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-586 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006

A
Component Description UBS009F6

When the shift position is P or N (A/T models), Neutral (M/T models), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is
turned ON. EC
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
For A/T models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also indicates a transmission range switch to
detect selector lever position.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009F7

Specification data are reference values.

D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF E
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009F8

NOTE: F
If DTC P1706 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
● Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
circuit is open or shorted.] H
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) ● Harness or connectors
P1706 Park/neutral position [The CAN communication line is open or
switch is not changed in the process of
1706 switch shorted.] (5-speed A/T models)
engine starting and driving.
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
I
● Unified meter and A/C amp. (A/T models)
● TCM (5-speed A/T models)
J
DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009F9

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
M
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
N and P position (A/T models)
ON
Neutral position (M/T models)
Except the above position OFF

If NG, go to EC-590, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y

3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

Revision: June 2004 EC-587 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-

onds.
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6,375 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL more than 2.0 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-590, "Diagnostic Procedure"

. SEF213Y

Overall Function Check UBS009FA

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
P and N position (A/T models)
Approx. 0
Neutral position (M/T models)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except the above position
(11 - 14V)
3. If NG, go to EC-590, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MBIB0043E

Revision: June 2004 EC-588 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

Wiring Diagram UBS009FB

EC

BBWA0648E

Revision: June 2004 EC-589 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON]
Approximately 0V
● Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral M/T)
102 G/W PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS00AOH

1. CONFIRM THE TRANSMISSION TYPE

Which type of transmission (M/T, 4-speed A/T or 5-speed A/T) is on the vehicle?
M/T, 4-speed A/T or 5-speed A/T
M/T >> Go to EC-590, "PROCEDURE A" .
4-speed A/T>>Go to EC-591, "PROCEDURE B" .
5-speed A/T>>Go to EC-593, "PROCEDURE C" .
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and
body ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
BBIA0258E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-590 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F59, M71
● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-14, "POSITION SWITCH" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch. E

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F

>> INSPECTION END

G
PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
H
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No I
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
J
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector M50. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminals
32, 33 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester under the follow- L
ing conditions.
Voltage M
Condition (Shift position)
Terminal 32 Terminal 33
BATTERY VOLTAGE
P position Approximately 0 V
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
N position Approximately 0 V
(11 - 14V)
PBIB1675E
Except the above position Approximately 0 V Approximately 0 V

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-591 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.

BBIA0259E

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between PNP switch terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB1676E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F58, M70
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 7 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 32,
PNP switch terminal 9 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 33.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F59, M71
● Harness for open or short between PNP switch and “unified meter and A/C amp.”

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-592 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

7. CHECK PNP SWITCH A

Refer to AT-106, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
D
>> INSPECTION END

9. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 25. F
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
G
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. H
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.

11. REPLACE UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. K

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

L
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE C
M
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Refer to AT-425, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START.
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-593 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and “unified meter and A/C amp.” terminal 25.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.

5. REPLACE UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-594 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14955

A
Component Description UBS009FD

The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from EC
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator. C

BBIA0045E

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009FE

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up
Except above conditions OFF
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009FF

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

H
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1800 VIAS control solenoid valve An excessively low or high voltage signal is (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
1800 circuit sent to ECM through the valve shorted.) I
● VIAS control solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009FG J

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II L
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. M
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-597, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-595 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram UBS009FH

BBWA0649E

Revision: June 2004 EC-596 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE C
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
29 Y/B VIAS control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 0 - 1.0V D
rpm.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF] E
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF] F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE G
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009FI

1. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector. I
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0045E
L

4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II

or tester. M
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0173E

Revision: June 2004 EC-597 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● IPDM E/R connector E122
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-598, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009FJ

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

PBIB0177E

Revision: June 2004 EC-598 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With GST
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol- A
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition EC
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
C
No supply No Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

MEC488B
D

Removal and Installation UBS009FK

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE E

Refer to EM-24, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-599 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

Description UBS009FL

Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009FM

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009FN

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch shorted.)
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
● Stop lamp switch

FALI-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009FO

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-602, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-600 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram UBS009FP

EC

BBWA0650E

Revision: June 2004 EC-601 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009FQ

1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

BBIA0049E

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0117E

Revision: June 2004 EC-602 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 EC
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse

C
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. E
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch I

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
J
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-604, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. L

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-603 2004 Maxima

 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection UBS009FR

STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

BBIA0049E

2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2

under the following conditions.
Conditions Continuity
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again.

PBIB0118E

Revision: June 2004 EC-604 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

A
Component Description UBS009FS

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009FT
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
ACCEL SEN1 ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN2* (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON H

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009FU

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.) K
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
M
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-605 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009FV

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-608, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-606 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009FW

EC

WBWA0101E

Revision: June 2004 EC-607 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
82 GR APP sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
83 G APP sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
LG/R (A/T)
90 APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
LG (M/T)
91 P APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.45V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 V
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.95V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009FX

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-608 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

D
BBIA0028E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 2 and ground with E

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

PBIB0811E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
J

>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-609 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-610, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009FY

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.45V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

5. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS009FZ

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-610 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

A
Component Description UBS009G0

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009G1
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
ACCEL SEN1 ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN2* (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON H

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009G2

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.) K
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
L
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
M
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-611 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009G3

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-614, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-612 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009G4

EC

WBWA0102E

Revision: June 2004 EC-613 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
82 GR APP sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
83 G APP sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
LG/R (A/T)
90 APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
LG (M/T)
91 P APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.45V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 V
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.95V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009G5

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-614 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

D
BBIA0028E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 1 and ground with E

CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

PBIB0812E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
J

>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
M
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-615 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 6.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-616, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009G6

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.45V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

5. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS009G7

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-616 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR PFP:16119

A
Component Description UBS009G8

Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to EC
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi- C
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- D
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009G9

Specification data are reference values.

F
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
THRTL SEN1 (Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009GA

H

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
● Harness or connector
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P2135 shorted.)
2135
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 J
mance problem and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

K
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode L
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. M
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-617 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009GB

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-620, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-618 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009GC

EC

WBWA0075E

Revision: June 2004 EC-619 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Throttle position sensor
47 G [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
power supply
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
Throttle position sensor
66 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully released
69 R Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
● Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009GD

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-620 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

D
BBIA0233E

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal E

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. G

PBIB0082E H

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. J

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-622, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-621 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009GE

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

50 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

69 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next PBIB1060E

step.
7. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS009GF

ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-622 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002

A
Component Description UBS009GG

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera- EC
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB0146E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009GH
F
Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
G
ACCEL SEN1 ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
ACCEL SEN2* (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON H

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS009GI

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

J
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connector
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P2138
2138
sensor circuit range/perfor- ECM compared with the signals from shorted.) K
mance problem APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2.
● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2

FAIL-SAFE MODE L
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

Revision: June 2004 EC-623 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS009GJ

NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-626, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.

Revision: June 2004 EC-624 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009GK

EC

WBWA0103E

Revision: June 2004 EC-625 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
82 GR APP sensor 1 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
83 G APP sensor 2 ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
LG/R (A/T)
90 APP sensor 1 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
LG (M/T)
91 P APP sensor 2 power supply [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.45V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 V
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 2.4V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.95V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
106 W
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
● Engine stopped Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009GL

1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.

>> GO TO 2.

BBIA0232E

Revision: June 2004 EC-626 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

D
BBIA0028E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 1, 2 and ground E

with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G

PBIB0782E H

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. I
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM
J

>> Repair harness or connectors.

4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 4, ECM terminal 83 and
APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-627 2004 Maxima

 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 3, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between accelerator pedal position sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009GM

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106 Fully released 0.6 - 0.95V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

98 Fully released 0.3 - 0.45V

(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2) Fully depressed Less than 2.4V
MBIB0023E

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

5. Perform EC-48, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-48, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-49, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation UBS009GN

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-628 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448

A
Component Description UBS009GO

IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON-OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.

BBIA0244E
F

Revision: June 2004 EC-629 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

Wiring Diagram UBS009GP

BBWA0651E

Revision: June 2004 EC-630 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off) D
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
E
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

Revision: June 2004 EC-631 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

BBWA0652E

Revision: June 2004 EC-632 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 0.4V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

60 P/W Ignition signal No. 5 SEC986C E

61 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
62 BR/R Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.6V

[Engine is running] F
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
G
SEC987C

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H

Revision: June 2004 EC-633 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

BBWA0653E

Revision: June 2004 EC-634 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.

0 - 0.4V C

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition D
● Idle speed

79 GR/R Ignition signal No. 6 SEC986C E

80 GR Ignition signal No. 4
81 G/R Ignition signal No. 2 0.1 - 0.6V

[Engine is running] F
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
G
SEC987C

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009GQ

1. CHECK ENGINE START I

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No J
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4. K

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

L
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
M
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

PBIB0133E

Revision: June 2004 EC-635 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.

SEC986C
PBIB1186E

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.

4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-140, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM"
.

MBIB0034E

Revision: June 2004 EC-636 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

BBIA0044E
E
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. G
NG >> GO TO 6.

H
PBIB0624E

6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122.
J
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. K
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

Check the following.

● Harness connectors E22, F35
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-637 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-639, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser.

10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

BBIA0244E

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

PBIB0138E

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F43, F201
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F35

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-638 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13. D

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. E
● Harness connectors F201, F43
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and engine ground
F

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. H
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
I
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. J
NG >> GO TO 15.

15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F43, F201
L
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
M
16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-639, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009GR

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: June 2004 EC-639 2004 Maxima

 IGNITION SIGNAL

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3

PBIB0847E

CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)

PBIB0794E

Removal and Installation UBS009GS

IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-36, "IGNITION COIL" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-640 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

VIAS PFP:14956
A
Description UBS009GT

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. E

PBIB1822E

When the engine is running at medium speed, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid K
valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes
the power valve.
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the total length of passage A and pas- L
sage B. This long intake manifold provides increased amount of intake air, which results in improved suction
efficiency and higher torque.
When engine is running at low or high speed, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid
valve and the power valve is opened. M
Under this condition, the effective intake manifold length is equivalent to the length of passage B. This short-
ened intake manifold length results in enhanced engine output due to reduced suction resistance under high
speeds.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control sys-
tem. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The
vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid
valve.

BBIA0045E

Revision: June 2004 EC-641 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

VIAS Control Solenoid Valve

The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil
pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the
power valve actuator.

BBIA0045E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009GU

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
1,800 - 3,600 rpm ON
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up
Except above conditions OFF

Revision: June 2004 EC-642 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

Wiring Diagram UBS009GV

EC

BBWA0654E

Revision: June 2004 EC-643 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
29 Y/B VIAS control solenoid valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed is between 1,800 and 3,600 0 - 1.0V
rpm.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
● For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF
111 W/B
(Self shut-off)
[Ignition switch: OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch OFF
119 R/G BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
120 R/G (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009GW

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and make sure that power valve actuator rod moves.

BBIA0252E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that
power valve actuator rod moves.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
NG (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.

BBIA0046E

Revision: June 2004 EC-644 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE A

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
EC
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following condi-
C
tions.

BBIA0253E

G
VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum
ON Should exist.
OFF Should not exist. H

OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator. I
NG >> GO TO 4.

3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE J

Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
K
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Start engine and let it idle.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. L

BBIA0254E

5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.

Condition Vacuum
12V direct current supply Should exist.
No supply Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-645 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Stop engine.
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power
valve actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or dis-
connection. Refer to EC-28, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.

SEF109L

5. CHECK VACUUM TANK

Refer to EC-647, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace vacuum tank.

6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0045E

4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II

or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

PBIB0173E

Revision: June 2004 EC-646 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● IPDM E/R connector E122 EC
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
● Harness for open or short between VIAS control solenoid valve and ECM
C

>> Repair harness or connectors.

8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and VIAS control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-647, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
J
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K

>> INSPECTION END

L
Component Inspection UBS009GX

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
M
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
VIAS SOL VALVE between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.

PBIB0177E

Revision: June 2004 EC-647 2004 Maxima

 VIAS

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

MEC488B

VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the center port of vacuum tank.
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the other
port.

PBIB0846E

Removal and Installation UBS009GY

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EM-24, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-648 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600

A
Component Description UBS009GZ

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is EC
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM C
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

SEF375Z

E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009H0

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL G
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 4.0 msec
● No load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
H
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
INJ PULSE-B2 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No load
I

Revision: June 2004 EC-649 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram UBS009H1

BBWA0655E

Revision: June 2004 EC-650 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE C
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
D
● Idle speed

E
21 L/W Injector No. 5 SEC984C
22 R/Y Injector No. 3
23 R/B Injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
G
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

SEC985C H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
I
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed J

40 V/R Injector No. 6 SEC984C

41 G/W Injector No. 4 K
42 R/W Injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] L
● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
M
SEC985C

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009H2

1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-651 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

PBIB0133E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

MEC703B

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.

Revision: June 2004 EC-652 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

BBIA0237E
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage F

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.

H
PBIB0582E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M70, F58
J
● Harness connectors F44, F101
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors. L

5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

Revision: June 2004 EC-653 2004 Maxima

 INJECTOR CIRCUIT

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors F101, F44
● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-654, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injector.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection UBS009H3

INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

PBIB0181E

Removal and Installation UBS009H4

INJECTOR
Refer to EM-39, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-654 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042

A
Description UBS009H5

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage* C
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startabil-
D
ity. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the igni-
tion switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby
improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, E
which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
G
Except as shown above Stops.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the furl tank.

K
BBIA0081E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009H6

Specification data are reference values. L

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF

Revision: June 2004 EC-655 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram UBS009H7

BBWA0656E

Revision: June 2004 EC-656 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
113 B/O Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009H8

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. G
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2. H

BBIA0245E

2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. L

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1187E

Revision: June 2004 EC-657 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB1674E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second
after ignition switch is turned ON.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E

6. CHECK 15A FUSE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.

Revision: June 2004 EC-658 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E124.
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8. D

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. E
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M11, B1
F
● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser

>> Repair harness or connectors. G

9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. H
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
I
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. J
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK CONDENSER K

Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace condenser.

11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B1 terminal 15,
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
BBIA0236E
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-659 2004 Maxima

 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

12. CHECK FUEL PUPMP

Refer to EC-660, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection UBS009H9

FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

SEC918C

CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)

PBIB0794E

Removal and Installation UBS009HA

FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-660 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT PFP:11270

A
System Description UBS009HB

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC
Engine speed Engine mount Electronic controlled engine
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
control mount
Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed
C
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed and the vehicle speed. The
control system has 2-step control [Soft/Hard] D
Vehicle condition Engine mount control
Idle (With vehicle stopped) Soft
Except above conditions Hard E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009HC

Specification data are reference values. F

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Idle (With vehicle stopped) IDLE
ENGINE MOUNT ● Engine: Running G
Except above conditions TRVL

Revision: June 2004 EC-661 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT

Wiring Diagram UBS009HD

BBWA0657E

Revision: June 2004 EC-662 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: A
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- EC
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running] C
0 - 3.0V
Electronic controlled engine ● Idle speed (With engine stopped)
44 O
mount-1 [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except above conditions (11 - 14V) D
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
Electronic controlled engine ● Idle speed (With engine stopped) (11 - 14V)
63 W/R E
mount-2 [Engine is running]
0 - 3.0V
● Except above conditions

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009HE F

1. CONFIRM THE TRANSMISSION TYPE
Which type of transmission (A/T or M/T) is on the vehicle? G
A/T or M/T
A/T >> GO TO 2.
M/T >> GO TO 3. H

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

I
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Shift selector lever to D range while depressing the brake pedal and parking brake pedal. J
3. Perform “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II and check that the vibration changes according to
switching the condition (with vehicle stopped).
K

M
SEC237C

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Shift selector lever to D range while depressing the brake pedal and parking brake pedal.
3. Disconnect front or rear electronic controlled engine mount harness connector when engine speed is
more than 1,000 rpm.
4. When returning engine speed to idle speed, check that body vibration increases compared with the condi-
tion of the above step 2 (with vehicle stopped).
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

Revision: June 2004 EC-663 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT

3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Perform “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II and check that the body vibration changes accord-
ing to switching the condition (with vehicle stopped).
If the vibration is not changed, go to next step.
3. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front elec-
tronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5 seconds according
to the switching condition of “ENGINE MOUNTING” (with vehi-
cle stopped).

SEC237C

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Disconnect front electronic controlled engine mount harness connector when engine speed is more than
1,000 rpm.
3. When returning engine speed to idle speed, check that body vibration increases compared with the condi-
tion of the above step 1 (with vehicle stopped).
If the vibration is not changed, go to next step.
4. Check that the motor operating sound is heard from front electronic controlled engine mount for about 0.5
seconds when changing engine speed from idle to more than 1,000 rpm (with vehicle stopped).

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front electronic controlled engine mount harness connector and rear electronic controlled
engine mount harness connector (A/T models only).

BBIA0251E

3. Check voltage between electronic controlled engine mount ter-

minal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 4.

SEC920C

Revision: June 2004 EC-664 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
● Harness connectors M71, F59
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 EC
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between electronic controlled engine mount and battery
C

>> Repair harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND D
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and electronic engine mount terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. F
Front electronic controlled engine mount Rear electronic controlled engine mount
ECM terminal
terminal terminal (A/T models)
44 1 1 G
63 2 2

Continuity should exist. H

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT J

Visually check front and rear electronic controlled engine mount.

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace front or rear electronic controlled engine mount.
L
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
M

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-665 2004 Maxima

 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136

Component Description UBS009HF

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed in the RH side of the con-

denser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electro-
static volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to
voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cool-
ing fan system.

WBIA0441E

SEF099XA

Revision: June 2004 EC-666 2004 Maxima

 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009HG

EC

BBWA0658E

Revision: June 2004 EC-667 2004 Maxima

 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Refrigerant pressure sen-
49 BR/W [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
sor power supply
Sensors' ground
(MAF sensor / IAT sensor /
PSP sensor / EVAP control [Engine is running]
67 B system pressure sensor / ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ASCD steering switch / ● Idle speed
Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
70 W Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009HH

1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1188E

Revision: June 2004 EC-668 2004 Maxima

 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. EC
4. Turn ignition switch ON.

E
WBIA0441E

5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F

Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
H

PBIB0188E
I
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. J
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M71, F59
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

L
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67, TCM ter-
minal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Revision: June 2004 EC-669 2004 Maxima

 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M71, F59
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E131, M92
● Harness connectors M71, F59
● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation UBS009HI

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to ATC-16, "Refrigerant pressure sensor" .

Revision: June 2004 EC-670 2004 Maxima

 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350

A
Description UBS009HJ

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009HK

Specification data are reference values.

C
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. D
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
E
Diagnostic Procedure UBS009HL

1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
3. Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following
conditions. G

Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON H
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0103E
J
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions. K
Condition Indication
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
L
Lighting switch: OFF OFF

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0103E

3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Refer to GW-94, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .

>> INSPECTION END

4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Refer to LT-6, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-43, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
TEM -" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-671 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320

Component Description UBS009HR

When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-702, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

BBIA0087E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009HS

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
ON
BRAKE SW1 Clutch pedal and brake pedal: Fully released (M/T)
● Ignition switch: ON
(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
OFF
Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed (M/T)

BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

● Ignition switch: ON
(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

Revision: June 2004 EC-672 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Wiring Diagram UBS009HT

EC

BBWA0659E

Revision: June 2004 EC-673 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

● Brake pedal is fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully (11 - 14V)
released (M/T)
108 G/R ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
● Brake pedal is depressed (A/T)
Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal and/or brake pedal is slightly
depressed (M/T)

Revision: June 2004 EC-674 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009HU

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I A

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models C

CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF D
When brake pedal is fully released ON

M/T models E
CONDITION INDICATION
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF SEC011D
F
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON

Without CONSULT-II G
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions. H
A/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
I
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage

M/T models J

CONDITION VOLTAGE
MBIB0061E
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V K
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. L
NG (M/T models)>>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models)>>GO TO 8.
M

Revision: June 2004 EC-675 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON

SEC013D

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB1677E

3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0087E

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal IS fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0857E

Revision: June 2004 EC-676 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. EC

BBIA0088E
E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
F
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. G
NG >> GO TO 5.

H
PBIB0799E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

Check the following.

● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 J
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
K
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. M
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

Refer to EC-681, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.

Revision: June 2004 EC-677 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

BBIA0087E

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

PBIB0857E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Revision: June 2004 EC-678 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A

Refer to EC-681, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. EC
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
D

BBIA0049E
G

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT -II or tester. H
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

PBIB0117E

K
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 L
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
M

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

Revision: June 2004 EC-679 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

16. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
● Harness connectors E25, M90
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-681, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-680 2004 Maxima

 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection UBS009HV

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals EC
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity C
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
D
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

E
SEC023D

ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. G
Condition Continuity
When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
H
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,

"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. I

SEC024D

J
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
K
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
Condition Continuity L
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
M
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

PBIB0118E

Revision: June 2004 EC-681 2004 Maxima

 ASCD INDICATOR

ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814

Component Description UBS009HW

ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set-
ting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-702, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS009HX

Specification data are reference value.

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CRUISE switch: pressed ON
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: released OFF
● CRUISE switch: ON COAST/SET switch: pressed ON

SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h COAST/SET switch: released OFF
(89 MPH)

Revision: June 2004 EC-682 2004 Maxima

 ASCD INDICATOR

Wiring Diagram UBS009HY

EC

BBWA0660E

Revision: June 2004 EC-683 2004 Maxima

 ASCD INDICATOR

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009HZ

1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CRUISE switch: pressed ON
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: released OFF
● CRUISE switch: ON COAST/SET switch: pressed ON

SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h COAST/SET switch: released OFF
(89 MPH)

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-149, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .

3. CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

Refer to DI-34, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-25, "Communication Line Inspection" .

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-139, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: June 2004 EC-684 2004 Maxima

 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814

A
Wiring Diagram UBS009I0

EC

BBWA0661E

Revision: June 2004 EC-685 2004 Maxima

 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR

BBWA0662E

Revision: June 2004 EC-686 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950

A
Description UBS009I1

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC

G
PBIB1685E

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. H
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and J
idling.

Revision: June 2004 EC-687 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

BBIA0326E

Revision: June 2004 EC-688 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

EC

BBIA0260E

Revision: June 2004 EC-689 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

Component Inspection UBS009I2

EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.

PBIB1212E

FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.

SEF445Y

2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. SEF943S

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-334 .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-252 .
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-341 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-351 .

Revision: June 2004 EC-690 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

EVAP SERVICE PORT

Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP A
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC

BBIA0256E
D

Removal and Installation UBS009I3

EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.

J
BBIA0246E

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE K

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. L

PBIB1384E

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS009I4

CAUTION:
● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
● Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
● Do not start engine.
● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.

Revision: June 2004 EC-691 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.

PEF838U

6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure

indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.

PEF917U

8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-688, "EVAP-

ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

SEF200U

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.

SEF462UA

Revision: June 2004 EC-692 2004 Maxima

 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of EVAP canister

vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. A
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system
until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to
0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). EC
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-688, "EVAP- C
ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
BBIA0247E

Revision: June 2004 EC-693 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032

System Description UBS009I5

PBIB1387E

From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
– Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
– Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-51, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
– Disconnect battery ground cable.
● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Revision: June 2004 EC-694 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

Diagnostic Procedure UBS009I6

SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. A

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached. C
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. D
NG >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
F
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.

H
PBIB1381E

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

J
>> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR K

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace water separator.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

6. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

Revision: June 2004 EC-695 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.

PBIB1381E

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

>> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace water separator.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

6. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES

Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

Revision: June 2004 EC-696 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

7. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE A

Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.

8. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE C

Refer to EC-698, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

9. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE E

Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
G
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
I
11. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. J
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing K
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG L
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
M

SEF665U

Revision: June 2004 EC-697 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

Component Inspection UBS009I7

WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
● Do not disassemble water separator.

PBIB1032E

REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

BBIA0248E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-9, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:

Revision: June 2004 EC-698 2004 Maxima

 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.

b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. A
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank. EC
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. C
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer D
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

BBIA0248E

Revision: June 2004 EC-699 2004 Maxima

 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810

Description UBS009I8

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

SEC921C

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.

PBIB1588E

Component Inspection UBS009I9

PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.

PBIB1589E

Revision: June 2004 EC-700 2004 Maxima

 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION

PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE

1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. A
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
EC

S-ET277
D

Revision: June 2004 EC-701 2004 Maxima

 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930

System Description UBS009IA

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Electric throttle control
Park/Neutral position (PNP) ASCD vehicle speed control
Gear position actuator
switch
Unified meter and A/C amp.* Vehicle speed
TCM* Powertrain revolution
*: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is depressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
● Brake pedal is depressed
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
● VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET switch or RESUME switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

Revision: June 2004 EC-702 2004 Maxima

 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is A
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
● Brake pedal is released EC
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) C

Revision: June 2004 EC-703 2004 Maxima

 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

Component Description UBS009IB

ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-573 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-583 .
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-583 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-583 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-417 , EC-419 , EC-425 and EC-430 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-682 .

Revision: June 2004 EC-704 2004 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
Fuel Pressure UBS009IC

Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS009ID

M/T: 625±50 rpm

Target idle speed No load*1 (in P or N position) 4-speed A/T: 700±50 rpm C
5-speed A/T: 675±50 rpm
Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 825 rpm or more
Ignition timing In P or N position 15° ± 5° BTDC D
*1: Under the following conditions:
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
E
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Calculated Load Value UBS009IE F

Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

At idle 5 - 35 G
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35

Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS009IF

H
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle 1.1 - 1.5*V
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle* I
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
J
Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS009IG

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
K

80 (176) 0.295 - 0.349

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor UBS009IH L

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 M
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

EGR Temperature Sensor UBS00B2C

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

0 (32) 0.73 - 0.88
50 (122) 0.74 - 0.082
100 (212) 0.011 - 0.014

Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater UBS009II

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.3Ω

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS009IJ

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω

Revision: June 2004 EC-705 2004 Maxima

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS009IK

Refer to EC-280, "Component Inspection" .

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS009IL

Refer to EC-288, "Component Inspection" .

Throttle Control Motor UBS009IM

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω

Injector UBS009IN

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω

Fuel Pump UBS009IO

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω

Revision: June 2004 EC-706 2004 Maxima